Giao an tong hop

<span class='text_page_counter'>(1)</span>Tiểu học Tiên Cát 2015 - 2016 th. th. Week 1: From 24 to 28 August, 2015 Preparing: 19/8/2015 Unit 1: Nice to see you again. Period 1 Lesson 1: Part 1+2+3 I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: After the lesson students can greet and respond to greetings formally. 2. Skills: - Develop Ss speaking and listening skills 3. Language focus: - Sentence Partners: good morning, good afternoon, good evening, late, nice to see you again - Vocabulary: morning, afternoon, evening, late, again II.Teaching methods: - Communicative approach. Techniques:+ Ask and answer (say individually) + Work in pairs/ groups. + Discuss. III. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. VI. Teaching processes: 1. Class organization: - Greeting - Checking for the students' attendance. 2. Oral test: - Check pupils: check sts' notebook, textbook, …. 3. New lesson: Teacher’s activities Ps’ activities Warm up Say hello all Sts and ask them about their personal Greeting information 1.Look, listen and repeat - Ask students to look at the picture in the book and ask: Look at the picture and Who are they in the picture? answer Where are they? What are they talking about? They are teacher and Tell Ps that they are going to practice greeting and students responding to greetings formally. Point the first picture, They are in the class elicit the names of characters and what are they saying: Miss Hien is greeting her students. Have Ps repeat the The whole class text a few times. Repeat the procedure with the second picture. Do choral and individual repetition, pointing to the T- WC characters speaking. Play the recording for Ps to listen and say along. Have Ps to find out the new structure. Whole class repeats it for several times 2. Point and say. Nguyễn Thị Thanh Hương. 1.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(2)</span> Tiểu học Tiên Cát 2015 - 2016 a. New words: Good morning : Chào buổi sáng Repeat after T Good afternoon : chào buổi chiều Good evening : Chào buổi tối Late: muộn Nice to see you again: rất vui được gặp bạn Very well: rất khỏe Check vocab Slap the board b. New sentence pattern: Good …….., + name. Chào ………một người nào đó Tell Ps that they are going to practice saying Good …….., + name. And responding to greeting. Point Work in pairs to the first picture and elicit the name to fill the gap. Put the sentence on the board and have Ps repeat them a few times. The whole class Do choral and individual repetition, using the pictures in the book. Get Ps to greet T in the classroom or at school. Check as Work in pairs a class. Ask some of them to act out the greetings with you Work in pairs 4. Consolidation -Asking Ps to focus on the structure once again. - Retell the content of the lesson. 5. Homework Do exercises in the workbook. Learn by heart the new words and structures. Prepare for the next lesson ___________________________________________________________________ Week 1: From 24th to 28th August, 2015 Preparing:19/8/2015 Unit 1: Nice to see you again Period 2 Lesson 1: Part 3+4+5 I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: After the lesson students can greet and respond to greetings formally. 2. Skills: - Develop Ss listening and writing skills 3. Language focus: - Vocabulary: dear II.Teaching methods: - Communicative approach. Techniques: + Ask and answer (say individually) III. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. III.Teaching methods: - Communicative approach. Nguyễn Thị Thanh Hương. 2.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(3)</span> Tiểu học Tiên Cát 2015 - 2016 Techniques: + Ask and answer (say individually) VI. Teaching processes: 1. Class organization: - Greeting - Checking for the students' attendance. 2. Oral test: - Check pupils: check sts' new words and greeting and responding…. 3. New lesson: Teacher’s activities Ps’ activities Warm up greeting and respondingto greetings formally Greeting 3. Listen and tick. Tell Ps that they are going to listen and tick the correct Look at the picture and boxes. Give a few seconds for Ps to look at the pictures. answer Check comprehension and give feedback. Work in pairs Play the recording three times for Ps to listen, do the task Listen to the tape and check their answers. Get Ps to swap and check their answers before checking as Work in pairs class. Answer: 1.b 2.a 3.a 4. Look and write. Tell Ps that they are going fill the gaps with morning, Individually work afternoon, and bye. Give Ps a few seconds to look the pictures read the text in silence. Check comprehension and give feedback. Elicit the words filling the gaps. Get Ps time to do the task. Go around offer help, if necessary. Get Ps to swap and check their answers before checking as Work in pairs a class. Write the correct answers on the board for Ps to copy down their notebooks. Call some pairs to read the text aloud Answer: 1. morning 2. afternoon. 3. bye 5. Let’s sing. Tell Ps that they are going to sing the Good morning to Listen and sing you song. Read each line and check comprehension. Sing each line and have Ps repeat it. When Ps are familiar with the tune, ask them to sing and do the actions. Ask groups of Ps to sit face to face and practice singing Group works and doing the actions. Call a group of five to sing the song and do the actions. Have the whole sing the song and do the actions. 4.Consolidation - Consolidate the content of the lesson 5. Homework Do exercises in the workbook. Prepare for the next lesson. Nguyễn Thị Thanh Hương. 3.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(4)</span> Tiểu học Tiên Cát 2015 - 2016 th. th. Week 1: From 24 to 28 August, 2015 Preparing:19/8/2015 Unit 1: Nice to see you again Period 3 Lesson 2 Part 1+2+3 I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: After the lesson students can say and respond to good bye. 2. Skills: - Develop Ss speaking and listening skills 3. Language focus: - Sentence Partners: good night - Vocabulary: bye, see, meet, again, tomorrow, later II.Teaching methods: - Communicative approach. Techniques:+ Ask and answer (say individually) + Work in pairs/ groups. + Discuss. III. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. VI. Teaching processes: 1. Class organization: - Greeting - Checking for the students' attendance. 2. Oral test: - Check pupils: check sts' greeting and responding,…. 3. New lesson: Teacher’s activities Ps’ activities Warm up: Sing Good morning to you song All class 1.Look, listen and repeat. Tell Ps that they are going to practice saying and Look at the pictures in responding good bye the book Check understanding. Elicit the names of characters in each picture and explain what they say. Have Ps repeat the The whole class text a few times. Repeat the procedure with the second picture. Play the recording for Ps to listen and say along. Listen and repeat Have Ps to find out the new structure. Whole class repeat it for several times 2. Point and say. a. New words Good bye = bye : tạm biệt Good nigh : chúc ngủ ngon See = meet : gặp Again : lại, llần nữa The whole class tomorrow : ngày mai later : sau Tell Ps that they are going to practice saying and Observe the pictures and responding to good bye. Point to each picture and elicit answer T's questions his/her name. Point to the first picture and elicit the word to fill the gap. Put the sentence on the board and have Ps repeat them a few times. Nguyễn Thị Thanh Hương. 4.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(5)</span> Tiểu học Tiên Cát 2015 - 2016 Do choral and individual repetition, using the pictures in the book. Get Ps to work in pairs. Check as a class. Work in pairs 3 - Let’s talk: Tell the class that they are going to practice more with their friends. Draw Ps’ attention to the sentences and elicit the language that might use. Elicit the words to fill in the Individually gaps. Put the sentences on the board and do choral and individual repetition Have Ps work in pair to greet and respond to greeting. Work in pairs - Display the dialogue in front of the class, others comment 4. Consolidation - Consolidate the content of the lesson 5. Homework Do exercises in the workbook. Learn by heart the new words. Prepare for the next lesson -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Week 1: From 24th to 28th August, 2015 Preparing: 19/8/2015 Unit 1: Nice to see you again Period 4 Lesson 2 Part 4+5+6 I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: After the lesson students can say and respond to good bye. 2. Skills: - Develop Ss speaking and listening and writing skills 3. Language focus: - Sentence Partners: good night, Nice to meet you II.Teaching methods: - Communicative approach. Techniques:+ Ask and answer (say individually) + Work in pairs/ groups. + Discuss. III. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. VI. Teaching processes: 1. Class organization: - Greeting - Checking for the students' attendance. 2. Oral test: - Check pupils: check sts' saying and responding to goodbye…. 3. New lesson: Teacher’s activities Ps’activities Warm up: Jumpled words Sts do 4. Listen and number Nguyễn Thị Thanh Hương 5.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(6)</span> Tiểu học Tiên Cát 2015 - 2016 Tell Ps that they are going to listen and number the pictures. Observe the pictures Give a few seconds for Ps to look at the pictures. Check comprehension and give feedback. Play the recording three times for Ps to listen, do the task Listen and number the and check their answers. pictures Get Ps to swap and check their answers before checking as Work in pairs class. Answer: 1.c 2.a 3.d 4.b 5. Look and write New words: America: Observe the pictures Tell Ps that they are going to look, read and fill the gaps with the appropriate words. Give Ps a few seconds to read Individually work the text in silence. Check comprehension and give feedback Get Ps time to do the task. Go around offer help, if necessary. Get Ps to work in pairs Get Ps to swap and check their answers before checking as a class. Write the correct answers on the board for Ps to copy down their notebooks. Work in pairs Call some pairs to read the text. Answer: 1. America/Tom 2. Mr Loc/Good morning 3. Good night/good night 6. Let’s play - Tell Ps that they are going to play game: Bing. Follow the The whole class procedure: Draw a word gird on the board and ask Ps to Good Good Good copy it. Have them to tell the words they have learnt in their morni afterno eveni lessons. List the words on the board. Each P chooses nine -ng -on -ng words from the list to copy each word onto a piece of paper Nice good Good and call out the word. Ps with that word in their grid can to me- night bye cross out. The quickist P to cross out and entire row of et you words in the gird and can out bingo is the winner. You can Bye hello hi continue the game until a P has crossed out 4.Consolidation - Consolidate the content of the lesson 5. Homework Do exercises in the workbook. Learn by heart the new words. Prepare for the next lesson ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------. Nguyễn Thị Thanh Hương. 6.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(7)</span> Tiểu học Tiên Cát 2015 - 2016 st. th. Week 2: From 31 August to 4 September, 2015 Preparing: 28/8/2015 Teaching : 31/8/2015 Unit 1: Nice to see you again Period 5 Lesson 3 Part 1+2+3 I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: After the lesson students can say and respond to good bye, greet and respond to greetings formally, and pronounce correctly the letters l and n in words and in sentences 2. Skills: - Develop Ss speaking and listening skills 3. Language focus: - Sentence Partners: good night, Nice to meet you II. Teaching methods: - Communicative approach. Techniques:+ Ask and answer (say individually) + Work in pairs/ groups. + Discuss. III. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. VI. Teaching processes: 1. Class organization: - Greeting - Checking for the students' attendance. 2. Oral test: - Check pupils: check sts' saying and responding to goodbye…. 3. New lesson: Teacher’s activities Ps’activities Warm up - Ask ps to read two dialogues on page 8 in order to check Pairs work their pronunciation of the sound of the letters 1. Listen and repeat. Tell Ps that they are going to practice saying the letters, Read the letters and words, sentences in the book. Put the phonics letters l and n words on the board and say them a few times. Ask Ps to repeat after you. Prompt Ps to say the words and sentences, paying attention to the target phonics letters. Do chorally repetition Listen and repeat of the words and sentences unit Ps feel confident. 2. Listen and circle. Then write and say aloud. Tell Ps that they are going to do a dictation. Give Ps a few Read the letters and seconds Ps a few seconds to read the in the silence before sentences starting the dictation. Get Ps to swap and check their answers before checking as Listen to the tape class. Write the correct answers on the board for Ps to copy Individually down their notebooks. Get Ps to work in pairs and practice saying sentences. Pairs work Nguyễn Thị Thanh Hương. 7.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(8)</span> Tiểu học Tiên Cát 2015 - 2016 Answer: 1. b 2. b 3.b 4.a 3. Let’s chant. Tell Ps that they are going to say the Hello, friends chant. T- WC Say the chant and check comprehension. Have Ps repeat every line of the chant. When they are familiar with the rhythm, show them how to say the chant and do the actions. Divide the class into three groups to say the chant. Get groups of Ps to sit face to face and practice chanting and Group work doing the actions. Get around and offer help, if necessary. 4.Consolidation - Consolidate the content of the lesson 5. Homework Do exercises in the workbook. Prepare for the next lesson ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Week 2: From 31st August to 4th September, 2015 Preparing: 28/8/2015 Teaching : 31/8/2015 Unit 1: Nice to see you again Period 6 Lesson 3 Part 4+5+6 I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: After the lesson students can say and respond to good bye, greet and respond to greetings formally. 2. Skills: - Develop Ss reading and writing skills 3. Language focus: - Sentence Partners: good night, Nice to meet you II.Teaching methods: - Communicative approach. Techniques:+ Ask and answer (say individually) + Work in pairs/ groups. + Discuss. III. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. VI. Teaching processes: 1. Class organization: - Greeting - Checking for the students' attendance. 2. Oral test: - Check pupils: check sts' saying and responding to goodbye…. 3. New lesson: Teacher’s activities Ps’ activivties Warm up: Read the Hello, friends chant. Whole class 4. Read and answer. New words: Sydney: 1 thành phố của Úc Australia: Nước Úc Individually Nguyễn Thị Thanh Hương 8.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(9)</span> Tiểu học Tiên Cát 2015 - 2016 From: từ Be from: đến từ Tell Ps that they are going to read the Student's cards . T- WC Check understanding. Give Ps a few seconds to read the text in silence then answer the questions below. Individually Give Ps time to do the task. Go around offer help, if necessary. Pairs works Get Ps to swap and check their answers before checking as class. T- WC Do choral and individual repetition Answer: 1. She is Hoa 3. He is Tony 2, She's from Viet Nam 4. He's from Australia 5. Write about you. Write about themshelves Tell Ps that they are going to write about their individual information. Give Ps a few seconds to look at the pictures. Individually Call a few Ps and elicit the words to fill in the gaps. Give Ps time to do the task. Go around offer help, if necessary. Pairs works Get Ps to swap and check their answers before checking as class. Call a few Ps to read their sentences aloud 6. Project - Introduce the name card. The whole class - Explain how to do the exercise: Make name cards and Present them to class. Give Ss time to do project in class. Ask Ss to write the information about themselves. Individually Encourage them decorate their cards. Get Ps to swap in pairs. Go around and help Ss if necessary. Pair work Call several Ps to the front of the class to present their cards, using their name cards and saying Hello, I’m… Have Ps stick Their cards on the wall of the classroom The whole class 4.Consolidation - Consolidate the content of the lesson 5. Homework Do exercises in the workbook. Learn by heart the new words. Prepare for the next lesson ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------. Nguyễn Thị Thanh Hương. 9.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(10)</span> Tiểu học Tiên Cát 2015 - 2016 st. th. Week 2: From 31 August to 4 September, 2015 Preparing: 28/8/2015 Teaching : 01/9/2015 Unit 2: I'm from Japan Period 7 Lesson 1 part 1+2 I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: After the lesson students can ask and answer questions about where someone is from 2. Skills: - Develop Ss speaking and listening skills 3. Language focus: - Sentence Partners: Where are you from? - I’m from England. - Vocabulary: Japan, America, England, Australia, Malaysia, from II.Teaching methods: - Communicative approach. Techniques: + Ask and answer (say individually) + Work in pairs/ groups. + Discuss. III. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. VI. Teaching processes: 1. Class organization: - Greeting - Checking for the students' attendance. 2. Oral test: - Check pupils: check sts' saying and responding to goodbye…. 3. New lesson: Teacher’s activities Ps’ activities Warm up - Ps sing the chant on page 10 The whole class 1. Look, listen and repeat. Tell Ps that they are going to practice asking and answering questions about where someone is from, using What are The whole class you from? Draw Ps’ attention to the first picture and elicit the names of characters and what are they saying. Have Ps repeat the text a few times. Repeat the procedure with the T-WC second picture. Do choral and individual repetition, pointing to the The whole class characters speaking. Play the recording for Ps to listen and say along. Have Ps to find out the new structure. Whole class repeats Individually it for several times 2. Point and say. New words - Japan nước Nhật (translate) T- WC - Malaysia nước Malaysia(translate) Nguyễn Thị Thanh Hương. 1.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(11)</span> Tiểu học Tiên Cát 2015 - 2016 individually. - Tokyo thủ đô củ nước Nhật(translate) - England nước Anh (translate) - London thủ đô của nước Anh The whole class - New york 1 thành phố của nước Mỹ Sentence pattern A: Where are you from?(Bạn đến từ đâu?) B: I’m from England. ( tôi đến từ Anh ) Tell Ps that they are going to practice asking and answering T-WC questions What are you from? Point to each picture and elicit the meaning of new words. Point to the first picture and elicit the word to fill the gap. Put the question and answer on the board and have Ps repeat them a few times. Do choral and individual repetition, using the pictures in The whole class the book. Get Ps to work in pairs imagine you are Hakim, Tom, Work in pairs Tony, Linda, Akio. Introduce themselves and ask and answer where they are from. Invite a few pairs to perform in front of the class 4. Consolidation - Consolidate the content of the lesson 5. Homework Do exercises in the workbook. Learn by heart the new words. Prepare for the next lesson ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------. Week 2: From 31st August to 4th September, 2015 Preparing: 28/8/2015 Teaching : 01/9/2015 Unit 2: I'm from Japan Period 8 Lesson 1 part 3+4+5 I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: After the lesson students can ask and answer questions about where someone is from 2. Skills: - Develop Ss listening and writing skills 3. Language focus: - Sentence Partners: Where are you from? - I’m from England. II. Teaching methods: - Communicative approach. Techniques:+ Ask and answer (say individually) + Work in pairs/ groups. + Discuss. III. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. VI. Teaching processes: 1. Class organization: - Greeting Nguyễn Thị Thanh Hương. 1.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(12)</span> Tiểu học Tiên Cát 2015 - 2016 - Checking for the students' attendance. 2. Oral test: - Check pupils: check sts' ask and answer questions about where someone is from 3. New lesson: Teacher’s activities Ps’ activities Warm up slap the board Some ps Japa from n Englan Malaysia Australi America where a 3. Listen and tick. Tell Ps that they are going to listen and tick the correct The whole class boxes. Give a few seconds for Ps to look at the pictures. Check comprehension and give feedback. Play the recording three times for Ps to listen, do the task Individually and check their answers. Get Ps to swap and check their answers before checking as Work in pair class. Key: 1.c 2.b 3.b 4. Look and write. Tell Ps that they are going to look, read the text and fill the T-WC gaps. Give Ps a few seconds to read the text in silence. Check comprehension and give feedback Get Ps time to do the task. Go around offer help, if Individually necessary. Get Ps to swap and check their answers before checking as Work in pair a class. Write the correct answers on the board for Ps to copy down their notebooks. Call some Ps to read the text and sentences aloud Individually Key: 1. Australia 2. Malaysia 3. America 4. Japan 6. Let’s sing Get Ps to match each character with the corresponding lines before they listen to the song. Tell Ps that they are going to sing the Where are you from? Listen and sing after song. Play the recording all the way through for the first the song tune time. Then have them repeat each line twice. When they are singing the song, show them how to mine the lyrics ( Eg: I'm from VietNam: placing the right hand on Work in pairs their chest, Hello, Mai: waving the right hand; Nice to meet you: shaking the hands with each other) Get Ps to practise singing and mining the song in groups Work in group 4. Consolidation - Consolidate the content of the lesson 5. Homework Do exercises in the workbook. Learn by heart the new words. Prepare for the next lesson Nguyễn Thị Thanh Hương. 1.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(13)</span> Tiểu học Tiên Cát 2015 - 2016 th. th. Week 3: From 7 to 11 Sept, 2015 Preparing: 4/9/2015 Teaching : 7/9/2015 Unit 2: I'm from Japan Period 9: Lesson 2 part 1+2+3 I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: After the lesson students can ask and answer questions about one's nationality 2. Skills: - Develop Ss speaking and listening skills 3. Language focus: - Sentence Partners: What nationality are you? - I’m English. - Vocabulary: Japanese, American, English, Australian, Malaysian, nationality, Vietnamese II.Teaching methods: - Communicative approach. Techniques:+ Ask and answer (say individually) + Work in pairs/ groups. + Discuss. III. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. VI. Teaching processes: 1. Class organization: - Greeting - Checking for the students' attendance. 2. Oral test: - Check pupils: check sts' asking and answering questions about where someone is from 3. New lesson: Teacher’s activities Ps’ activities Warm up Play game: jumbled letters America, Australia Ailasrtua m e r i a cA England, Japan L a e n g n d. a J a p n. 1.Look, listen and repeat. Tell Ps that they are going to practice asking and answering questions about one's nationality, using What nationality are you? - I’m English. Draw Ps’ attention to the first picture and elicit the names of characters and the activities. Have Ps repeat the text a few times. Repeat the procedure with the second picture. Give feedback and check the new vocabulary. Play the recording for Ps to listen and say along. Have Ps to find out the new structure. Whole class repeat Nguyễn Thị Thanh Hương. 1. Ask students to look at the picture, listen and repeat. Read aloud Work in pair The whole class.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(14)</span> Tiểu học Tiên Cát 2015 - 2016 it for several times 2. Point and say. New words: Japanese: Tiếng, Người Nhật Individually American: Người Mĩ English : Tiếng, Người Anh Australian: Tiếng, Người Úc The whole class Malaysian: Người Malaysia Nationality: Quốc tịch Vietnamese: Tiếng, Người Việt Modal Sentence What nationality are you? - I’m…. The whole class Tell Ps that they are going to practice asking and answering questions What nationality are you? - I’m…. Point to each picture and elicit the meaning of new The whole class words. Point to the first picture and elicit the word to fill the gap. Put the question and answer on the board and have Ps repeat them a few times. Do choral and individual repetition, using the pictures in T-WC the book. Get Ps to work in pairs. Check as a class. Work in pair 3. Let’s talk Tell Ps that they are going to practice more with the The whole class questions: Where are you from? What nationality are you? Call a pair to give a demonstration of the dialogue before starting the activity. The whole class Have Ps work in pairs. Go around offer help and correct the pronunciation, if necessary. T-WC Call a few pairs to act out the dialogue in front of the class to use their genuine names and those of local cities Work in pairs or towns 4. Consolidation - Consolidate the content of the lesson 5. Homework Do exercises in the workbook. Learn by heart the new words. Prepare for the next lesson ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------. Nguyễn Thị Thanh Hương. 1.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(15)</span> Tiểu học Tiên Cát 2015 - 2016 th. th. Week 3: From 7 to 11 Sept, 2015 Preparing: 4/9/2015 Teaching : 7/9/2015 Unit 2: I'm from Japan Period 10: Lesson 2 Part 4+5+6 I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: After the lesson students can ask and answer questions about one's nationality 2. Skills: - Develop Ss writing and listening skills 3. Language focus: - Sentence Partners: What nationality are you? - I’m English. II.Teaching methods: - Communicative approach. Techniques:+ Ask and answer (say individually) + Work in pairs/ groups. + Discuss. III. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. VI. Teaching processes: 1. Class organization: - Greeting - Checking for the students' attendance. 2. Oral test: - Check pupils: check sts' asking and answering questions about one's nationality 3. New lesson: Teacher’s activities Ps’ activities Warm up Complete these words in the table Country Nationality Individually Ame....... Aus........ The whole class Vie...... Teacher Eng..... Mala..... Ja.... 4. Listen and number Observer the pictures Tell Ps that they are going to listen and number the Guessing the answer pictures. Give a few seconds for Ps to look at the Individually pictures. Check comprehension and give feedback. Play the recording three times for Ps to listen, do the task Listen to the tape and check their answers. Get Ps to swap and check their answers before checking Work in pair as class. Key 1.b 2.d 3.a 4.c 5. Look and write. The whole class Tell Ps that they are going to look, read the text and Nguyễn Thị Thanh Hương. 1.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(16)</span> Tiểu học Tiên Cát 2015 - 2016 answer the questions. Give Ps a few seconds to read the Observer the pictures text in silence. Check comprehension and give feedback Get Ps time to do the task. Go around to offer help, if necessary. Groups work Get Ps to swap and check their answers before checking as a class. Write the correct answers on the board for Ps to copy down their notebooks. The whole class Call some Ps to read questions and answers Answer: 1. America/American 2. England/English Individually 3. Japan/Japanese 6. Let’s play Tell Ps that they are going to play the Find someone who… game. Explain to Ps how to play game: prepare The whole class equal numbers of cards with the following words: Japan, America, England, Australia,Malaysia. The total number of Ps. Then mix the cards up and deliver one to every The whole class individual in the class. The cards present where the Ps are from. Tell Ps to choose a country. They should talk to their classmates and try to find one who is from the country Groups work they have chosen. When everyone has found a classmate from the country of their choice, call a few to introduce themselves and The whole class their partners, by saying the countries they are from and their nationalities. (Eg: I'm Ha. I'm from English. Linh is from Japan. She's Japanese.) 4. Consolidation - Consolidate the content of the lesson 5. Homework Do exercises in the workbook. Learn by heart the new words. Prepare for the next lesson ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------. Nguyễn Thị Thanh Hương. 1.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(17)</span> Tiểu học Tiên Cát 2015 - 2016 th. th. Week 3: From 7 to 11 Sept, 2015 Preparing: 4/9/2015 Teaching : 8/9/2015 Unit 2: I'm from Japan Period 11: Lesson 3 Part 1+2+3 I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: After the lesson students can ask and answer questions about one's nationality and where someone is, and pronounce correctly the letters j and v in words and in sentences 2. Skills: - Develop Ss speaking and listening skills 3. Language focus: - Sentence Partners: What nationality are you? - I’m English. - Vocabulary: II.Teaching methods: - Communicative approach. Techniques:+ Ask and answer (say individually) + Work in pairs/ groups. + Discuss. III. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. VI. Teaching processes: 1. Class organization: - Greeting - Checking for the students' attendance. 2. Oral test: - Check pupils: check sts' asking and answering questions about one's nationality 3. New lesson: Teacher’s activities Ps’ activities Warm up Write names of some countries 1.Listen and repeat. Tell Ps that they are going to practice saying the letters, Individual words, sentences in the book. Put the phonics letters J and T-WC V on the board and say them a few times. Ask Ps to repeat after you. Prompt Ps to say the words and sentences, Read the letters and paying attention to the target phonics letters. Do chorally words repetition of the words and sentences unit Ps feel confident. 2. Listen and tick. Then say aloud Listen and repeat Tell Ps that they are going to do a dictation. Give Ps a few seconds Ps a few seconds to read the in the silence before starting the dictation. Get Ps to swap and check their answers before checking Read the letters and as class. Write the correct answers on the board for Ps to sentences copy down their notebooks. Get Ps to work in pairs and practice saying sentences. Listen to the tape Nguyễn Thị Thanh Hương. 1.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(18)</span> Tiểu học Tiên Cát 2015 - 2016 Individually. Answer: 1. b 2. a 3. Let’s chant. Tell Ps that they are going to say the What nationality are Pairs work you? chant. Say the chant and check comprehension. Have Ps repeat every line of the chant. When they are familiar with the rhythm, show them how to say the chant and do the actions. Divide the class into three groups to say the chant. T- WC Get groups of Ps to sit face to face and practice chanting and doing the actions. Get around and offer help, if necessary. Call two groups to the front of the class to chant. The Group work whole class claps along the rhythm. 4. Consolidation - Consolidate the content of the lesson 5. Homework Do exercises in the workbook. Learn by heart the new words. Prepare for the next lesson -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------. Week 3: From 7th to 11th Sept, 2015 Preparing: 4/9/2015 Teaching : 8/9/2015 Unit 2: I'm from Japan Period 13: Lesson 3 Part 4+5+6 I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: After the lesson students can ask and answer questions about one's nationality and where someone is 2. Skills: - Develop Ss reading and writing skills 3. Language focus: - Sentence Partners: What nationality are you? - I’m English. - Vocabulary: different, country, countries, zoo, flag II. Teaching methods: - Communicative approach. Techniques: + Ask and answer (say individually) + Work in pairs/ groups. + Discuss. III. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. VI. Teaching processes: 1. Class organization: - Greeting - Checking for the students' attendance. 2. Oral test: - Check pupils: check sts' asking and answering questions about one's nationality 3. New lesson: Teacher’s activities Ps’ activities Warm up sing the What nationality are you? chant. The whole class Nguyễn Thị Thanh Hương 1.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(19)</span> Tiểu học Tiên Cát 2015 - 2016 Teacher. 4. Read and complete. New words Different Country Individually Countries Zoo flag Tell Ps that they are going to read the text and complete the sentences. Give Ps a few seconds to read the text and The whole class look at the pictures. Check comprehension and elicit the words to fill the gaps then give feedback The whole class Get Ps time to do the task. Go around offer help, if necessary. Groups Get Ps to swap and check their answers before checking as a class. Write the correct answers on the board for Ps to Pairs work copy down their notebooks. Do choral and individual repetition Answers: 1 – Sydney/Australia/Australian 2 – London/England/English 3 – New York/ America/American 5. Let's write. Tell Ps that they are going to read and fill the gaps. Check comprehension and elicit the words to fill the gaps. The whole class Get Ps time to do the task. Go around offer help, if Individually necessary. Get Ps to swap and check their answers before checking as a class. Write the correct answers on the board for Ps to copy down their notebooks. Pairs work Do choral and individual repetition 6. Project Individually Tell Ps that they are going to fill the gaps of the name card and draw the flag. Ps should select a country and The whole class make a name car for themselves. They should also draw a Individually small flag of the country. Prepare resource like: scissors, cards, rulers, pens, and crayons. Ask Ps to look at the sample name card in the book and tell them to draw a rectangular box of 9 cm width x 5 cm Individually height on a card. Have them copy down the text onto the box and complete the details before drawing the flag and trimming the card. Have a display of all the name cards and select a few Ps to present their orally before removing all the cards to keep in Ps' portfolios. 4. Consolidation -Consolidate the content of the lesson 5. Homework Do exercises in the workbook. Learn by heart the new words. Prepare for the next lesson. Nguyễn Thị Thanh Hương. 1.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(20)</span> Tiểu học Tiên Cát 2015 - 2016 th. th. Week 4: From 14 to 18 Sept, 2015 Preparing: 11/9/2015 Teaching \:14/9/2015 Unit 3: What day is it today? Period 13: Lesson 1 Part 1+2 I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: After the lesson students can ask and answer questions about days of a week 2. Skills: - Develop Ss listening, speaking skill, do exercises in book 3. Language focus: - Sentence Partners: What day is it today? - It is Monday. -Vocabulary: Monday,Tuesday,Wednesday,Thursday,Friday,Saturday,Sunday, day II.Teaching methods: - Communicative approach. Techniques:+ Ask and answer (say individually) + Work in pairs/ groups. + Discuss. III. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. VI. Teaching processes: 1. Class organization: - Greeting - Checking for the students' attendance. 2. Oral test: - Check pupils: check sts' asking and answering questions about one's nationality 3. New lesson: Teacher’s activities Ps’ activities Warm up sing the What nationality are you? chant The whole class 1. Look, listen and repeat. Tell Ps that they are going to practice asking and Look at the picture and answering questions about days of a week, using What day answer is it today? - It is Monday. Draw Ps’ attention to the first They are teacher and picture and elicit the names of characters and what are students they saying. Have Ps repeat the text a few times. Repeat They are in the class the procedure with the second picture. Do choral and individual repetition, pointing to the The whole class characters speaking. Play the recording for Ps to listen and say along. Have Ps to find out the new structure. Whole class repeats T- WC it for several times 2. Point and say. New words Repeat after T Monday Tuesday Wednesday Thursday Friday Saturday Slap the board Nguyễn Thị Thanh Hương. 2.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(21)</span> Tiểu học Tiên Cát 2015 - 2016 Sunday day Modal sentence What day is it today? - It is Monday Tell Ps that they are going to practice asking and answering questions What day is it today? - It is Monday. Point to each picture and elicit the meaning of new words. Point to the first picture and elicit the word to fill the gap. Work in pairs Put the question and answer on the board and have Ps repeat them a few times. Do choral and individual repetition, using the pictures in The whole class the book. Get Ps to work in pairs ask and answer partner what day is Work in pairs it today. Check as a class. 4. Consolidation -Consolidate the content of the lesson 5. Homework Do exercises in the workbook. Learn by heart the new words. Prepare for the next lesson ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Week 4: From 14th to 18th Sept, 2015 Preparing: 11/9/2015 Teaching :14/9/2015 Unit 3: What day is it today? Period 14: Lesson 1 Part 3+4+5 I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: After the lesson students can ask and answer questions about days of a week 2. Skills: - Develop Ss listening, writing skill, do exercises in book 3. Language focus: - Sentence Partners: What day is it today? - It is Monday. -Vocabulary: Monday,Tuesday,Wednesday,Thursday,Friday,Saturday,Sunday, day II.Teaching methods: - Communicative approach. Techniques:+ Ask and answer (say individually) + Work in pairs/ groups. + Discuss. III. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. VI. Teaching processes: 1. Class organization: - Greeting - Checking for the students' attendance. 2. Oral test: - Check pupils: check sts' asking and answering questions about days of a week 3. New lesson: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Hương. 2.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(22)</span> Tiểu học Tiên Cát 2015 - 2016 Warm up Matching column A and column B Column A Column B 1. Thứ 7 a. Monday, 2. Thứ 5 b. Tuesday 3. Thứ 2 c. Thursday 4. Thứ 6 d. Friday 5. Thứ 3 e. Saturday 4. Listen and tick. Tell Ps that they are going to listen and tick the correct boxes. Give a few seconds for Ps to look at the pictures. Check comprehension and give feedback. Play the recording three times for Ps to listen, do the task and check their answers. Get Ps to swap and check their answers before checking as class. Key: 1.b 2.a 3.c 5. Look and write. Tell Ps that they are going to look the table, read the text and fill the gaps. Give Ps a few seconds to read the text in silence. Check comprehension and give feedback Get Ps time to do the task. Go around to offer help, if necessary. Get Ps to swap and check their answers before checking as a class. Write the correct answers on the board for Ps to copy down their notebooks. Call some Ps to read the text and sentences aloud Key: 1.Monday 2.Tuesday 3. Saturday 4.Sunday 6. Let’s sing Tell Ps that they are going to sing the The alphabet song song. Read each line and check comprehension. Sing each line and have Ps repeat it. When Ps are familiar with the tune, ask them to sing and do the actions. Ask groups of Ps to sit face to face and practice singing and doing the actions. Call a group of five to sing the song and do the actions. Have the whole sing the song and do the actions. The whole class. WC - T Individually Listen to the tape and tick the picture Work in pair. WC - T Individually Work in pair Read aloud. Listen to the tape and sing the song follow the tune they hear Groups work Whole class. 4. Consolidation - Consolidate the content of the lesson 5. Homework Do exercises in the workbook. Learn by heart the new words. Prepare for the next lesson. Nguyễn Thị Thanh Hương. 2.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(23)</span> Tiểu học Tiên Cát 2015 - 2016 th. th. Week 4: From 14 to 18 Sept, 2015 Preparing: 11/9/2015 Teaching :15/9/2015 Unit 3: What day is it today? Period 15: Lesson 2 Part 1+2+3 I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: After the lesson students can ask and answer questions about weekly activities. 2. Skills: - Develop Ss listening, speaking skill, do exercises in book 3. Language focus: - Sentence Partners: What do you do on…….? - I help my parents at home. - Vocabulary: go to the zoo, help my parents, play the guitar, go swimming, visit II.Teaching methods: - Communicative approach. Techniques:+ Ask and answer (say individually) + Work in pairs/ groups. + Discuss. III. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. VI. Teaching processes: 1. Class organization: - Greeting - Checking for the students' attendance. 2. Oral test: - Check pupils: check sts' asking and answering questions about days of a week 3. New lesson: Teacher’s activities Ps’ activities Warm up Slap the board Monday Two ps Tuesday Sunday Saturday. Wednesday. Friday. 1.Look, listen and repeat. Tell Ps that they are going to practice asking and answering questions weekly activities, using What do you do on…….? - I help my parents at home. Draw Ps’ attention to the first picture and elicit the names of characters and the activities. Have Ps repeat the text a few times. Repeat the procedure with the second picture. Give feedback and check the new vocabulary. Play the recording for Ps to listen and say along. Have Ps to find out the new structure. Whole class repeat it for several times 2. Point and say. Nguyễn Thị Thanh Hương. 2. The whole lass Teacher The whole class The whole class groups.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(24)</span> Tiểu học Tiên Cát 2015 - 2016 The whole class. Vocabulary: go to the zoo help my parents play the guitar go swimming visit Sentence Partners: What do you do on…….? - I help my parents at home. Tell Ps that they are going to practice asking and answering questions What do you do on…….? Point to The whole class each picture and elicit the meaning of new words. Point to the first picture and elicit the word to fill the gap. Put Individually the question and answer on the board and have Ps repeat them a few times. The whole class Do choral and individual repetition, using the pictures in the book. Get Ps to work in pairs. Check as a class. Pairs work 3. Let’s talk Tell Ps that they are going to practice more with their The whole class friends. Give a few seconds for Ps to read the questions Individually and check comprehension. Call a pair to give a demonstration of the answer before starting the activity. Pairs work Have Ps work in pairs. Go around offer help and correct the pronunciation, if necessary. Call a few pairs to act out the dialogue in front of the Pairs work class. 4.Consolidation - Consolidate the content of the lesson 5. Homework Do exercises in the workbook. Learn by heart the new words. Prepare for the next lesson ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------. Nguyễn Thị Thanh Hương. 2.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(25)</span> Tiểu học Tiên Cát 2015 - 2016 th. th. Week 4: From 14 to 18 Sept, 2015 Preparing :11/9/2015 Teaching :15/9/2015 Unit 3: What day is it today? Period 16: Lesson 2 part 4+5+6 I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: After the lesson students can ask and answer questions about weekly activities. 2. Skills: - Develop Ss listening, writing skill, do exercises in book 3. Language focus: - Sentence Partners: What do you do on…….? - I help my parents at home. - Vocabulary: go to the zoo, help my parents, play the guitar, go swimming, visit II. Teaching methods: - Communicative approach. Techniques:+ Ask and answer (say individually) + Work in pairs/ groups. + Discuss. III. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. VI. Teaching processes: 1. Class organization: - Greeting - Checking for the students' attendance. 2. Oral test: - Check pupils: check sts' asking and answering questions about weekly activities. 3. New lesson: Teacher’s activities Ps’ activities Warm up Reorder some words Two ps 1. etdyaus 2. maydno The whole class 3. dsauny 4. dyaifr Teacher 4. Listen and number Tell Ps that they are going to listen and number the pictures. Give a few seconds for Ps to look at the Look at the pictures, pictures. Check comprehension and give feedback. listen to the tape and Play the recording three times for Ps to listen, do the number them task and check their answers. Get Ps to swap and check their answers before checking as class. Pairs work Key a.3 b.2 c.4 d.1 5. Look and write. Tell Ps that they are going to look, read the text and fill the suitable words into the gaps. Give Ps a few seconds to read the text in silence. Check comprehension and Look, read the text give feedback and fill the suitable Get Ps time to do the task. Go around offer help, if words into the gaps Nguyễn Thị Thanh Hương. 2.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(26)</span> Tiểu học Tiên Cát 2015 - 2016 necessary. individually Get Ps to swap and check their answers before checking as a class. Write the correct answers on the board for Ps to copy down their notebooks. Pairs work Call some Ps to read questions and answers Answer: 1. Friday 2. go to school 3. go swimming 4. Saturday 5. go to school Individually 6. Let’s play - Explain how the game Slap the board is played: Ps have to divide into two groups. Put the nine words on the board. Ask three Ps to come to the front. Say one of The whole class the words on the board. The P who fastest lo slap the correct word to gets one point. The one who gets the most points at the end of the game will win. To make it Groups work more challenging, you may say words that are not on the board (Ps should not slap the board) Put the scores of individual Ps on the board and Praise the group winner with the class. 4.Consolidation - Consolidate the content of the lesson 5. Homework - Do exercises in the workbook. Learn by heart the new words. Prepare for the next lesson ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Week 5: From 21st to 25th Sept, 2015 Preparing: 18/9/2015 Teaching : 21/9/2015 Unit 3: What day is it today? Period 17: Lesson 3 part 1+2+3 I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: After the lesson students can ask and answer questions about weekly activities, days of a week and pronounce correctly the letters ir, ur and er 2. Skills: - Develop Ss listening, speaking skill, do exercises in book 3. Language focus: - Sentence Partners: What do you do on…….? - I help my parents at home. - Vocabulary: go to the zoo, help my parents, play the guitar, go swimming, visit II.Teaching methods: - Communicative approach. Techniques:+ Ask and answer (say individually) + Work in pairs/ groups. + Discuss. III. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. VI. Teaching processes: 1. Class organization: - Greeting Nguyễn Thị Thanh Hương. 2.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(27)</span> Tiểu học Tiên Cát 2015 - 2016 - Checking for the students' attendance. 2. Oral test: - Check pupils: check sts' asking and answering questions about weekly activities. 3. New lesson: Teacher’s activities Ps’ activities Warm up Matching column A and column B The whole class Column A Column B 1. go to a. My parents 2. help b. swimming 3. play c. The guitar 4. go d. school 1.Listen and repeat. Read the letters ir, ur Tell Ps that they are going to practice saying the letters, words, sentences in the book. Put the phonics letters ir, ur and er the words and and er on the board and say them a few times. Ask Ps to the sentences corectly repeat after you. Prompt Ps to say the words and sentences, paying attention to the target phonics letters. Do chorally repetition of the words and sentences unit Ps Listento the tape and repeat. feel confident. 2. Listen and circle. Then say aloud. Tell Ps that they are going to do a dictation. Give Ps a few WC - T seconds Ps a few seconds to read the in the silence before Work in pair starting the dictation. Listen to tape do Get Ps to swap and check their answers before checking exercise individually as class. Write the correct answers on the board for Ps to copy down their notebooks. Read aloud Get Ps practice saying sentences. Answer 1. b 2. b 3. a 3. Let’s chant. Whole class Tell Ps that they are going to say the What do you do Read the sentences in on…? chant. Say the chant and check comprehension. the chant fluently. Have Ps repeat every line of the chant. When they are familiar with the rhythm, show them how to say the chant Listen to the tape and read after them and do the actions. Divide the class into three groups to say the chant. Groups work Get groups of Ps to sit face to face and practice chanting and doing the actions. Get around and offer help, if necessary. Groups work Call two groups to the front of the class to chant. The whole class claps along the rhythm. 4.Consolidation - Consolidate the content of the lesson 5. Homework - Do exercises in the workbook. Learn by heart the new words. Prepare for the next lesson Nguyễn Thị Thanh Hương. 2.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(28)</span> Tiểu học Tiên Cát 2015 - 2016 st. th. Week 5: From 21 to 25 Sept, 2015 Preparing: 18/9/2015 Teaching: 21/9/2015 Unit 3: What day is it today? Period 18: Lesson 3 part 4+5+6 I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: After the lesson students can ask and answer questions about weekly activities, days of a week 2. Skills: - Develop Ss reading, writing skill, do exercises in book 3. Language focus: - Sentence Partners: What do you do on…….? - I help my parents at home. - Vocabulary: - school day, weekend, at/on the weekend II.Teaching methods: - Communicative approach. Techniques:+ Ask and answer (say individually) + Work in pairs/ groups. + Discuss. III. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. VI. Teaching processes: 1. Class organization: - Greeting - Checking for the students' attendance. 2. Oral test: - Check pupils: check sts' asking and answering questions about weekly activities. 3. New lesson: Teacher’s activities Ps’ activities Warm up: sing the What do you do on…? Chant The whole class 4. Read and answer. New words: - school day: - weekend - at/on the weekend: Tell Ps that they are going to read the text then answer the The teacher -WC questions below. Check understanding. Give Ps a few Individually seconds to read the text in silence. Check comprehension. Give Ps time to do the task. Go around offer help, if WC - T necessary. Get Ps to swap and check their answers before checking Work in pair as class. Do choral and individual repetition Answer: 1. Mai 2. Monday 3. No. 4. She goes swimming on Saturdays and visits her grandparents on Sundays 5. Write about you. Tell Ps that they are going to write themselves. Give Ps a Read te questions and few seconds to look at the pictures. Elicit the names of answer them individually each activity. Call a few Ps and answer the questions Pairs work Nguyễn Thị Thanh Hương. 2.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(29)</span> Tiểu học Tiên Cát 2015 - 2016 Give Ps time to do the task. Go around to offer help, if Practice with the partners necessary. Call some pairs to act out Get Ps to swap and check their answers before checking as class. Whole class Call a few pairs to practice asking and answering Pairs work 6. Project. Tell Ps that they are going to interview one of their Individually classmate about what he/she does at the weekend. Write some sample questions on the board and have Ps copy them down. Then do an interview with a P as example. Ask Ps to rehearse the interview if there is enough time. Then ask them to do the interview after class or over the weekend and report the report the results in next lesson. Teach them how to report. Eg: Good morning, everyone. Here are the results of my interview. On Sundays, Minh plays football in the morning and listen to music in the afternoon. On Sunday, he goes swimming in the morning and visits his grandparents in the afternoon. Remind them to speak slowly and clearly, and keep eye contact with the audience 4.Consolidation - Consolidate the content of the lesson 5. Homework - Do exercises in the workbook. Learn by heart the new words. Prepare for the next lesson -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Week 5: From 21st to 25th Sept, 2015 Preparing: 18/9/2015 Teaching : 22/9/2015 Unit 4: When's your birthday? Period 19: Lesson 1 Part 1+2 I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: After the lesson students can ask and answer questions about dates 2. Skills: - Develop Ss listening, writing skills, do exercises in book 3. Language focus: - Sentence Partners: What is the date today? - It's the first of October - Vocabulary: 1st –the first, 2nd –the second, 3rd –the third, 4th –the fourth, 5th –the fifth, 21st –twenty first, 22nd –twenty second, 23rd –twenty third, 31st –thirty first II.Teaching methods: - Communicative approach. Techniques:+ Ask and answer (say individually) + Work in pairs/ groups. + Discuss. III. Teaching aids: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Hương. 2.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(30)</span> Tiểu học Tiên Cát 2015 - 2016 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. VI. Teaching processes: 1. Class organization: - Greeting - Checking for the students' attendance. 2. Oral test: - Check pupils: check sts' asking and answering questions about weekly activities. 3. New lesson: Teacher’s activities Ps’ activities Warm up: Sing the What do you do on…? Chant The whole class 1. Look, listen and repeat. Tell Ps that they are going to practice asking and answering questions about dates, using What is the date The teacher -WC today? - It's the first of October. Draw Ps’ attention to the first picture and elicit the names of characters and what are they saying. Have Ps repeat the text a few times. Repeat the procedure with the second picture. Do choral and individual repetition, pointing to the WC - T characters speaking. Play the recording for Ps to listen and say along. Listen to the tape and Have Ps to find out the new structure. Whole class repeats repeat them it for several times 2. Point and say. New words: 1st – the first 21st – twenty first 2nd – the second 22nd – twenty second Individually rd rd 3 – the third 23 – twenty third Read the new words and th st 4 – the fourth 31 – thirty first check th 5 – the fifth Sentence Partners: What is the date today? - It's the first of October Tell Ps that they are going to practice asking and WC - T answering questions What is the date today? Point to each picture and elicit the meaning of new words. Point to the first picture and elicit the word to fill the gap. Put the question and answer on the board and have Ps repeat them Work in pair a few times. Do choral and individual repetition, using the pictures in Read aloud the book. Get Ps to work in pairs to ask and answer about the date Work in pairs today. Check as a class. 4. Consolidation - Consolidate the content of the lesson 5. Homework - Do exercises in the workbook. Learn by heart the new words. Prepare for the next lesson Nguyễn Thị Thanh Hương. 3.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(31)</span> Tiểu học Tiên Cát 2015 - 2016 st. th. Week 5: From 21 to 25 Sept, 2015 Preparing: 18/9/2015 Teaching: 22/9/2015 Unit 4: When's your birthday? Period 20: Lesson 1 Part 3+4+5 I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: After the lesson students can ask and answer questions about dates 2. Skills: - Develop Ss reading, writing skill, do exercises in book 3. Language focus: - Sentence Partners: What is the date today? - It's the first of October - Vocabulary: 1st –the first, 2nd –the second, 3rd –the third, 4th –the fourth, 5th –the fifth, 21st –twenty first, 22nd –twenty second, 23rd –twenty third, 31st –thirty first II.Teaching methods: - Communicative approach. Techniques:+ Ask and answer (say individually) + Work in pairs/ groups. + Discuss. III. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. VI. Teaching processes: 1. Class organization: - Greeting - Checking for the students' attendance. 2. Oral test: - Check pupils: check sts' asking and answering questions about dates. 3. New lesson: Warm up Matching column A and column B The whole class Column A Column B st 1 – the first Ngày 22 st 21 – twenty second Ngày mùng1 nd 2 – the second Ngày 31 rd 3 – the third Ngày mùng2 rd 23 – twenty third Ngày 23 st 31 – thirty first Ngày mùng3 4. Listen and tick. The teacher - WC Tell Ps that they are going to listen and tick the correct Individually boxes. Give a few seconds for Ps to look at the pictures. Look at the picture and Check comprehension and give feedback. Play the recording three times for Ps to listen, do the task name the dates in the calendar then listen to and check their answers. the tape Get Ps to swap and check their answers before checking Work in pair as class. Key: 1.b 2.c 3.a 5. Look and write. Tell Ps that they are going to look the pictures and fill the Nguyễn Thị Thanh Hương 3.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(32)</span> Tiểu học Tiên Cát 2015 - 2016 gaps. Give Ps a few seconds to read the text in silence. T-WC Check comprehension and give feedback Get Ps time to do the task. Go around offer help, if Individually necessary. Get Ps to swap and check their answers before checking Groups work as a class. Write the correct answers on the board for Ps to copy down their notebooks. Call some Ps to read the text and sentences aloud Read aloud Key: 1. the twelfth of October 2. the fourteenth of October 3. the thirty-first of October 6. Let’s sing. Tell Ps that they are going to sing the What is the date today? song. Read each line and check comprehension. Sing each line Read the sentences in and have Ps repeat it. When Ps are familiar with the tune, the song fluently. ask them to sing and do the actions. Ask groups of Ps to sit face to face and practice singing Listen to the tape and and doing the actions. sing after it Call a group of five to sing the song and do the actions. Have the whole sing the song and do the actions. Groups work 4. Consolidation - Consolidate the content of the lesson 5. Homework - Do exercises in the workbook. Learn by heart the new words. Prepare for the next lesson ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Week 6: From 28th to 2nd Sept, 2015 Preparing: 24/9/2015 Teaching :28/9/2015 Unit 4: When's your birthday? Period 21: Lesson 2 Part 1+2+3 I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: After the lesson students can ask and answer questions about someone's birthday 2. Skills: - Develop Ss listening, speaking skills, do exercises in book 3. Language focus: - Sentence Partners: When's your birthday? - It's on the first of October - Vocabulary: January, May, September, February, June, October, March, July, November, April, August, December, Birthday II.Teaching methods: - Communicative approach. Techniques:+ Ask and answer (say individually) + Work in pairs/ groups. + Discuss. III. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette. Nguyễn Thị Thanh Hương. 3.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(33)</span> Tiểu học Tiên Cát 2015 - 2016 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. VI. Teaching processes: 1. Class organization: - Greeting - Checking for the students' attendance. 2. Oral test: - Check pupils: check sts' asking and answering questions about dates. 3. New lesson: Teacher’s activities Ps’ activities Warm up sing the What is the date today? song. The whole class 1.Look, listen and repeat. Tell Ps that they are going to practice asking and WC - T answering questions about activities they like playing at Individually break time, using When's your birthday? Draw Ps’ attention to the first picture and elicit the names of characters and the activities. Have Ps repeat the text a few WC - T times. Repeat the procedure with the second picture. Give feedback and check the new vocabulary. Play the recording for Ps to listen and say along. Have Ps to find out the new structure. Whole class repeat it for several times 2. Point and say. New words: January May September February June October March July November Read the new words Birthday April August December and check Sentence Partners: When's your birthday? - It's on the first of October Tell Ps that they are going to practice asking and answering questions When's your birthday? Point to each They are Linda, Mai. picture and elicit the meaning of new words. Point to the They are talking about first picture and elicit the word to fill the gap. Put the their birthday. question and answer on the board and have Ps repeat them a few times. Do choral and individual repetition, using the pictures in Work in pair the book. Get Ps to work in pairs. Check as a class. 3. Let’s talk Tell Ps that they are going to practice more with their friends. Give a few seconds for Ps to read the questions Read aloud and find out the answer. Have Ps work in pairs. Go around offer help and correct Work in pair the pronunciation, if necessary. Call a few pairs to act out Call some pairs to act the dialogue in front of the class. out 4. Consolidation - Consolidate the content of the lesson 5. Homework - Do exercises in the workbook. Learn by heart the new words. Prepare for the next lesson --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Nguyễn Thị Thanh Hương. 3.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(34)</span> Tiểu học Tiên Cát 2015 - 2016 th. nd. Week 6: From 28 to 2 Sept, 2015 Preparing: 24/9/2015 Teaching :28/9/2015 Unit 4: When's your birthday? Period 22: Lesson 2 Part 4+5+6 I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: After the lesson students can ask and answer questions about someone's birthday 2. Skills: - Develop Ss listening, writing skills, do exercises in book 3. Language focus: - Sentence Partners: When's your birthday? - It's on the first of October - Vocabulary: January, May, September, February, June, October, March, July, November, April, August, December, Birthday II.Teaching methods: - Communicative approach. Techniques:+ Ask and answer (say individually) + Work in pairs/ groups. + Discuss. III. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. VI. Teaching processes: 1. Class organization: - Greeting - Checking for the students' attendance. 2. Oral test: - Check pupils: check sts' asking and answering questions about someone's birthday. 3. New lesson Teacher’s activities Ps’ activities Warm up:Matching column A and column B The whole class Column A Column B Tháng 7 a. February tháng 10 b. June Tháng 2 c. July Tháng 6 d. October Tháng 12 e. September 4. Listen and number WC - T Tell Ps that they are going to listen and number the pictures. Give a few seconds for Ps to look at the pictures. Individually Check comprehension and give feedback. Play the recording three times for Ps to listen, do the task WC - T and check their answers. Work in pair Get Ps to swap and check their answers before checking as class. Key a.3 b.1 c.4 d.2 5. Look and write. Nguyễn Thị Thanh Hương 3.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(35)</span> Tiểu học Tiên Cát 2015 - 2016 Tell Ps that they are going to look the pictures, read and WC - T answer the questions. Give Ps a few seconds to read the text in silence. Check comprehension and give feedback Get Ps time to do the task. Go around offer help, if Individually necessary. Get Ps to swap and check their answers before checking Work in pair as a class. Write the correct answers on the board for Ps to copy down their notebooks. Call some Ps to read questions and answers Read aloud Answer: 1. the fourth of February 2. the first of March 3. the twenty-third of June. 3. Let’s chant. Tell Ps that they are going to say the Months of the year chant. Say the chant and check comprehension. Have Ps Whole class read the repeat every line of the chant. When they are familiar with chant fluently, then the rhythm, show them how to say the chant and do the listen to the tape and actions. repeat after it Divide the class into three groups to say the chant. Get groups of Ps to sit face to face and practice chanting and doing the actions. Get around and offer help, if Pairs work necessary. Call two groups to the front of the class to chant. The whole class claps along the rhythm 4. Consolidation - Consolidate the content of the lesson 5. Homework - Do exercises in the workbook. Learn by heart the new words. Prepare for the next lesson ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------. Nguyễn Thị Thanh Hương. 3.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(36)</span> Tiểu học Tiên Cát 2015 - 2016 th. nd. Week 6: From 28 to 2 Sept, 2015 Preparing: 24/9/2015 Teaching :29/9/2015 Unit 4: When's your birthday? Period 23: Lesson 3 Part 1+2+3 I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: After the lesson students can ask and answer questions about someone's birthday, dates, and pronounce correctly the letters th and chin words and in sentences 2. Skills: - Develop Ss listening, speaking skills, do exercises in book 3. Language focus: - Sentence Partners: When's your birthday? - It's on the first of October - Vocabulary: II.Teaching methods: - Communicative approach. Techniques: + Ask and answer (say individually) + Work in pairs/ groups. + Discuss. III. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. VI. Teaching processes: 1. Class organization: - Greeting - Checking for the students' attendance. 2. Oral test: - Check pupils: check sts' asking and answering questions about someone's birthday. 3. New lesson Teacher’s activities Ps’ activities Warm up Slap the board June - The whole class Februar Jul August May - Teacher y y March Januar December Apri y l Novembe Septembe r r 1.Listen and repeat. Tell Ps that they are going to practice saying the letters, words, sentences in the book. Put the phonics letters th and Listen and repeat after chon the board and say them a few times. Ask Ps to repeat the teacher after you. Prompt Ps to say the words and sentences, paying attention to the target phonics letters. Do chorally repetition Whole class repeat of the words and sentences unit Ps feel confident. after the tape 2. Listen and circle. Then write and say aloud Tell Ps that they are going to do a dictation. Give Ps a few Read the sentences and Nguyễn Thị Thanh Hương. 3.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(37)</span> Tiểu học Tiên Cát 2015 - 2016 seconds Ps a few seconds to read the in the silence before the words given and starting the dictation. gess the anwer. Get Ps to swap and check their answers before checking as Individually class. Write the correct answers on the board for Ps to copy Pairs work down their notebooks. Get Ps to work in pairs and practice saying sentences. Answer: 1. b 2. a 3. a 4. a The whole class 3. Let’s chant. Tell Ps that they are going to say the When's your birthday? chant. Say the chant and check comprehension. Have Ps repeat every line of the chant. When they are familiar with The whole class the rhythm, show them how to say the chant and do the Ps listen, repeat every actions. line of the chant Divide the class into three groups to say the chant. Get groups of Ps to sit face to face and practice chanting and doing the actions. Get around and offer help, if Groups necessary. Call two groups to the front of the class to chant. The whole class claps along the rhythm. The whole class 4 .Consolidation - Consolidate the content of the lesson 5. Homework - Do exercises in the workbook. Learn by heart the new words. Prepare for the next lesson ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Week 6: From 28th Sept to 2nd Oct, 2015 Preparing: 24/9/2015 Teaching :29/9/2015 Unit 4: When's your birthday? Period 24: Lesson 3 Part 4+5+6 I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: After the lesson students can ask and answer questions about someone's birthday, dates 2. Skills: - Develop Ss reading, writing skills, do exercises in book 3. Language focus: - Sentence Partners: When's your birthday? - It's on the first of October - Vocabulary: : present, Invitation card, Time, Address, Write to me soon II.Teaching methods: - Communicative approach. Techniques:+ Ask and answer (say individually) + Work in pairs/ groups. + Discuss. III. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. Nguyễn Thị Thanh Hương. 3.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(38)</span> Tiểu học Tiên Cát 2015 - 2016 VI. Teaching processes: 1. Class organization: - Greeting - Checking for the students' attendance. 2. Oral test: - Check pupils: check sts' asking and answering questions about about someone's birthday. 3. New lesson Teacher’s activities Ps’ activities Warm up sing the Months of the year chant - The whole class 4. Read and tick. - Teacher New words: present: Invitation card Time Address Write to me soon: Tell Ps that they are going to read the card then tick the right answer. Check understanding. Give Ps a few seconds WC to read the text in silence. Check comprehension. Give Ps time to do the task. Go around offer help, if Individally necessary. Get Ps to swap and check their answers before checking as Pair works class. Do choral and individual repetition Answer: 1. b 2, a 3. b 5. Write an invitation card. Tell Ps that they are going to write themselves. Give Ps a few seconds to read the invitation card. Call a few Ps and elicit the words to fill in the gaps. The whole class Give Ps time to do the task. Go around to offer help, if necessary. Group works Get Ps to swap and check their answers before checking as class. Call a few Ps to read their sentences aloud 6. Project. Read aloud Tell Ps that they are going to make a birthday card for their friends. Prepare scissors, cards, rulers, colourful pencils and The whole class crayons. Give each of them a blank card. Set a time limit Individually for them to decorate their cards. Have Ps to write on cards. Put the following on the board as an example. Have Ps to tell the class about their birthday cards. Put their cards on the classroom board for display. 4. Consolidation - Consolidate the content of the lesson 5. Homework - Do exercises in the workbook. Learn by heart the new words. Prepare for the next lesson ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------. Nguyễn Thị Thanh Hương. 3.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(39)</span> Tiểu học Tiên Cát 2015 - 2016 th. th. Week 7: From 5 to 9 Oct, 2015 Preparing: 01/10/2015 Teaching :05/10/2015 Unit 5: Can you swim? Period 25: Lesson 1 part 1+2 I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: After the lesson students can ask and answer questions about what someone can/ cannot do 2. Skills: - Develop Ss listening, speaking skills, do exercises in book 3. Language focus: - Sentence Partners: What you can do?- I can…. - Vocabulary: dance. draw, swim, cook, skate, skip, can II.Teaching methods: - Communicative approach. Techniques:+ Ask and answer (say individually) + Work in pairs/ groups. + Discuss. III. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. VI. Teaching processes: 1. Class organization: - Greeting - Checking for the students' attendance. 2. Oral test:- Check pupils: check sts' asking and answering questions about someone's birthday. 3. New lesson Teacher’s activities Ps’ activities Warm up Reorder some words 1. Tembersep 2. Bruafery Two ps 3. Lujy 4. Prial Teacher 1. Look, listen and repeat. Tell Ps that they are going to practice asking and WC-T answering questions about what someone can/ cannot do, using What you can do?- I can…. Draw Ps’ attention to the first picture and elicit the names of characters and what are they saying. Have Ps repeat the text a few times. The whole lass Repeat the procedure with the second picture. Do choral and individual repetition, pointing to the characters speaking. Play the recording for Ps to listen and say along. Groups Have Ps to find out the new structure. Whole class repeats it for several times 2. Point and say. Vocabulary: Dance Draw Swim Individually Cook Skate Skip can Nguyễn Thị Thanh Hương. 3.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(40)</span> Tiểu học Tiên Cát 2015 - 2016 Sentence Partners: What you can do?- I can……. Tell Ps that they are going to practice asking and Teacher answering questions What do you do at break time? Point The whole lass to each picture and elicit the meaning of new words. Point Groups to the first picture and elicit the word to fill the gap. Put Teacher the question and answer on the board and have Ps repeat The whole class them a few times. Do choral and individual repetition, using the pictures in The whole class the book. Get Ps to work in pairs to talk about what they can really Work in pairs do. Check as a class. 4.Consolidation - Consolidate the content of the lesson 5. Homework - Do exercises in the workbook. Learn by heart the new words. Prepare for the next lesson ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Week 7: From 5th to 9th Oct, 2015 Preparing: 01/10/2015 Teaching :05/10/2015 Unit 5: Can you swim? Period 26: Lesson 1 part 3+4+5 I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: After the lesson students can ask and answer questions about what someone can/ cannot do 2. Skills: - Develop Ss listening, writing skills, do exercises in book 3. Language focus: - Sentence Partners: What you can do?- I can…. - Vocabulary: dance. draw, swim, cook, skate, skip, can II.Teaching methods: - Communicative approach. Techniques: + Ask and answer (say individually) + Work in pairs/ groups. + Discuss. III. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. VI. Teaching processes: 1. Class organization: - Greeting - Checking for the students' attendance. 2. Oral test:- Check pupils: check sts' asking and answering questions about what someone can/ cannot do 3. New lesson Teacher’s activities Ps ‘activities Warm up Nguyễn Thị Thanh Hương 4.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(41)</span> Tiểu học Tiên Cát 2015 - 2016 Write some phrases in English on the small board The whole class 1. bơi 4. nhảy dây 2. trượt patanh 5. nấu ăn Teacher 3. khiêu vũ 4. Listen and tick. Tell Ps that they are going to listen and tick the correct Teacher - The whole boxes. Give a few seconds for Ps to look at the pictures. class Check comprehension and give feedback. Play the recording three times for Ps to listen, do the task Listen to the tape and check their answers. Get Ps to swap and check their answers before checking Work in pair as class. Key: 1.a 2.c 3.a 5. Look and write. - Review the sentence pattern Note: What can you do? I can ……….. Tell Ps that they are going to look at the picture a and find out the words to fill the gaps. Give Ps a few seconds to The whole class read the text in silence. Check comprehension and give feedback Get Ps time to do the task. Go around offer help, if necessary. Individually Get Ps to swap and check their answers before checking as a class. Write the correct answers on the board for Ps to Work in pairs copy down their notebooks. Call some Ps to read the text and sentences aloud Key: 1. dance 2. skate 3. swim 4. ride a bike Read aloud 6. Let’s play Note: Can Cannot=can't: - Explain how the game Guessing game is played: Stick pictures of a dog, a fish and a parrot on the board. Check if Ps can recognize the animals. Point to a picture and ask The whole class some questions about the animal. Eg: What's this animal? What it can do? Can it swim? Groups work Divide Ps into groups of five. A P in one group says two sentences about one of the animals, using can and can't, The whole class and then asks what it is. Eg: It can swim, but it can't walk. What is it? The Ps of the other groups guess. Eg: It's a fish. The group that gives the right answer the fastest gets one point. The groups take turns asking and answering questions. The one that gets most point wins 4. Consolidation - Consolidate the content of the lesson 5. Homework - Do exercises in the workbook. Learn by heart the new words. Prepare for the next lesson Nguyễn Thị Thanh Hương. 4.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(42)</span> Tiểu học Tiên Cát 2015 - 2016 th. th. Week 7: From 5 to 9 Oct, 2015 Preparing: 01/10/2015 Teaching: 06/10/2015 Unit 5: Can you swim? Period 27: Lesson 2 Part 1+2+3 I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: After the lesson students can ask and answer questions about whether someone can do something 2. Skills: - Develop Ss listening, speaking skills, do exercises in book 3. Language focus: - Sentence Partners: Can you play football?- Yes, I can./ No, I can't - Vocabulary: Play/ table tennis/ volleyball/ play the piano/ play the guitar II.Teaching methods: - Communicative approach. Techniques:+ Ask and answer (say individually) + Work in pairs/ groups. + Discuss. III. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. VI. Teaching processes: 1. Class organization: - Greeting - Checking for the students' attendance. 2. Oral test: - Check pupils: check sts' asking and answering questions about what someone can/ cannot do 3. New lesson Teacher’s activities Ps’ activities Warm up: play game slap the board The whole class 1. Look, listen and repeat. Tell Ps that they are going to practice asking and answering questions about whether someone can do The whole class something, using Can you play football?- Yes, I can./ No, I can't. Draw Ps’ attention to the first picture and elicit the names of characters and the activities. Have Ps repeat the T- WC text a few times. Repeat the procedure with the second picture. Give feedback and check the new vocabulary. The whole class Play the recording for Ps to listen and say along. Have Ps to find out the new structure. Whole class repeat Individually it for several times 2. Point and say Vocabulary: Play Table tennis The whole class Volleyball play the piano play the guitar Individually Nguyễn Thị Thanh Hương. 4.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(43)</span> Tiểu học Tiên Cát 2015 - 2016 Sentence Partners: Can you play football? - Yes, I can./ No, I can't The whole class Tell Ps that they are going to practice asking and answering questions Can you play football? Point to each picture and elicit the meaning of new words. Point to the The whole class first picture and elicit the word to fill the gap. Put the question and answer on the board and have Ps repeat them a few times. Do choral and individual repetition, using the pictures in The whole class the book. Get Ps to work in pairs. Check as a class. Pairs work 3. Let’s talk Tell Ps that they are going to practice more with their The whole class friends about their abilities. Call a pair to give a Pairs work demonstration of the dialogue before starting the activity. Have Ps work in pairs. Go around offer help and correct T-The whole class the pronunciation, if necessary. Call a few pairs to act out the dialogue in front of the Pairs work class. 4. Consolidation - Consolidate the content of the lesson 5. Homework - Do exercises in the workbook. Learn by heart the new words. Prepare for the next lesson ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Week 7: From 5th to 9th Oct, 2015 Preparing: 01/10/2015 Teaching :06/10/2015 Unit 5: Can you swim? Period 28: Lesson 2 part 3+4+5 I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: After the lesson students can ask and answer questions about whether someone can do something 2. Skills: - Develop Ss listening, writing skills, do exercises in book 3. Language focus: - Sentence Partners: Can you play football?- Yes, I can./ No, I can't - Vocabulary: cycle, play chess, sing II.Teaching methods: - Communicative approach. Techniques:+ Ask and answer (say individually) + Work in pairs/ groups. + Discuss. III. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. Nguyễn Thị Thanh Hương. 4.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(44)</span> Tiểu học Tiên Cát 2015 - 2016 VI. Teaching processes: 1. Class organization: - Greeting - Checking for the students' attendance. 2. Oral test: - Check pupils: check sts' asking and answering questions about whether someone can do something 3. New lesson Teacher’s activities Ps’ activities Warm up Remember some action:Play/ table tennis/ volleyball/ The whole class play the piano/ play the guitar 4. Listen and number Tell Ps that they are going to listen and number the pictures. The whole class Give a few seconds for Ps to look at the pictures. Check comprehension and give feedback. Play the recording three times for Ps to listen, do the task and Listen to the tape check their answers. individually Get Ps to swap and check their answers before checking as Pairs work class. Key a.2 b.4 c.3 d.1 5. Look and write. New words: cycle = ride a bike play chess sing Tell Ps that they are going to look the pictures and the text and The whole class answer fill the suitable words into the blanks. Give Ps a few seconds to read the text in silence. Check comprehension and give feedback Get Ps time to do the task. Go around offer help, if necessary. Groups Get Ps to swap and check their answers before checking as a class. Write the correct answers on the board for Ps to copy Individually down their notebooks. Call some Ps to read questions and answers The whole class 6. Let’s sing. Tell Ps that they are going to sing the Can you swim? song. The whole class Read each line and check comprehension. Sing each line and have Ps repeat it. When Ps are familiar with the tune, ask them to sing and do the actions. Ask groups of Ps to sit face to face and practice singing and Groups doing the actions. Call a group of five to sing the song and do the actions. Have the whole sing the song and do the actions. Individually 4. Consolidation - Consolidate the content of the lesson 5. Homework - Do exercises in the workbook. Learn by heart the new words. Prepare for the next lesson Nguyễn Thị Thanh Hương. 4.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(45)</span> Tiểu học Tiên Cát 2015 - 2016 th. th. Week 8: From 12 to 16 Oct, 2015 Preparing: 08/10/2015 Teaching:12/10/2015 Unit 5: Can you swim? Period 29: Lesson 3 Part 1+2+3 I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: After the lesson students can ask and answer questions about what someone can/ cannot do, whether someone can do something and pronounce coretly the letters s and sw 2. Skills: - Develop Ss listening, speaking skill, do exercises in book 3. Language focus: - Sentence Partners: Can you play football?- Yes, I can./ No, I can't - Vocabulary: cycle, play chess, sing II. Teaching methods: - Communicative approach. Techniques: + Ask and answer (say individually) + Work in pairs/ groups. + Discuss. III. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. VI. Teaching processes: 1. Class organization: - Greeting - Checking for the students' attendance. 2. Oral test: - Check pupils: check sts' asking and answering questions about whether someone can do something 3. New lesson Teacher’s activities. Ps’ activities. Warm up swim fly lay gallop sing write read play draw ride drive speak use dance Play game: It can lay eggs and it can swim What is it? It can gallop but it can’t swim What is it? 1. Listen and repeat. Tell Ps that they are going to practice saying the letters, words, sentences in the book. Put the phonics letters s and sw on the board and say them a few times. Ask Ps to repeat after you. Prompt Ps to say the words and sentences, paying attention to the target phonics letters. Do choral repetition of Nguyễn Thị Thanh Hương. 4. Groups The whole class. The whole class Groups Individually.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(46)</span> Tiểu học Tiên Cát 2015 - 2016 the words and sentences unit Ps feel confident. 2. Listen and number. Then say aloud Tell Ps that they are going to do a dictation. Give Ps a few The whole class seconds Ps a few seconds to read the in the silence before Read the sentences starting the dictation. then greeing the Get Ps to swap and check their answers before checking as answer class. Write the correct answers on the board for Ps to copy The whole class down their notebooks. Get Ps to work in pairs and practice saying sentences. Pairs work Key: 1. b 2. c 3. d 4. a 3. Let’s chant. The whole class Tell Ps that they are going to say the Can you sing? chant. Say the chant and check comprehension. Have Ps repeat every line of the chant. When they are familiar with the rhythm, show them how to say the chant and do the actions. Divide the class into three groups to say the chant. Groups Get groups of Ps to sit face to face and practice chanting and doing the actions. Get around and offer help, if necessary. Call two groups to the front of the class to chant. The whole class claps along the rhythm 4. Consolidation - Consolidate the content of the lesson 5. Homework - Do exercises in the workbook. Learn by heart the new words. Prepare for the next lesson -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Week 8: From 12th to 16th Oct, 2015 Preparing: 08/10/2015 Teaching:12/10/2015 Unit 5: Can you swim? Period 30: Lesson 3 part 3+4+5 I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: After the lesson students can ask and answer questions about what someone can/ cannot do, whether someone can do something 2. Skills: - Develop Ss reading, writing skills, do exercises in book 3. Language focus: - Sentence Partners: Can you play football?- Yes, I can./ No, I can't - Vocabulary: cycle, play chess, sing II.Teaching methods: - Communicative approach. Techniques:+ Ask and answer (say individually) + Work in pairs/ groups. + Discuss. III. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette. Nguyễn Thị Thanh Hương. 4.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(47)</span> Tiểu học Tiên Cát 2015 - 2016 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. VI. Teaching processes: 1. Class organization: - Greeting - Checking for the students' attendance. 2. Oral test: - Check pupils: check sts' asking and answering questions about whether someone can do something 3. New lesson Teacher’s activities Ps’ activities Warm up - Call some ps work in pair to perform the dialogue on page 2 Work in pairs 4. Read and complete. Tell Ps that they are going to read the sentences then write the The whole class names under these pictures. Check understanding. Give Ps a few seconds to read the text in silence. Check comprehension. Individually Give Ps time to do the task. Go around offer help, if necessary. Get Ps to swap and check their answers before checking as class. Pairs works Do choral and individual repetition Key 1. Nam 2. Phong Groups 5. Write about you. Tell Ps that they are going to write themselves. Give Ps a few seconds to read the text then depend on to write about their own The whole class abilities. Give Ps time to do the task. Go around to offer help, if necessary. Individually Get Ps to swap and check their answers before checking as class. Pairs works Call a few Ps to read their sentences aloud 6. Project. Tell Ps that they are going to interview three friends to get information about their abilities and complete the charts. Ask Ps The whole to pay attention to the sample sentences in bubbles. Check their classPairs works understanding of the symbols in the chart. Get pair to do demonstration in front of the class as an example before starting the activity. Give Ps time to do the interview in class. Call some Ps to the front of the class to report on their work. If time allows, you may make a chart to show the number of Ps who can do each of the four activities and put it on the wall for display. 4. Consolidation - Consolidate the content of the lesson 5. Homework - Do exercises in the workbook. Learn by heart the new words. Prepare for the next lesson Nguyễn Thị Thanh Hương. 4.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(48)</span> Tiểu học Tiên Cát 2015 - 2016 th. th. Week 8: From 12 to 16 Oct ,2015 Preparing: 9/10/2015 Teaching : 12-16/10/2015. Period 31 REVIEW 1 I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: - Help students to review all the structure from unit 1 to unit 5 - Review the words, do exercises in the book 2. Skills: - Develop Ss listening, reading, writing skills, do exercises in book 3. Language focus: - Sentence Partners: from unit 1 to unit 5 - Vocabulary: from unit 1 to unit 5 II. Teaching methods: - Communicative approach. Techniques: + Ask and answer (say individually) + Work in pairs/ groups. + Discuss. III. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. VI. Teaching processes: 1. Class organization: - Greeting - Checking for the students' attendance. 2. Oral test: - Check pupils: check sts' asking and answering questions about whether someone can do something 3. New lesson Teacher’s activities Ps’ activities Warm up: play game slap the board The whole class 1. Listen and tick. Tell Ps that they are going to listen and tick the correct The whole class boxes. Give a few seconds for Ps to look at the pictures. Check comprehension and give feedback. Guess the answers Play the recording three times for Ps to listen, do the task T- WC and check their answers. Get Ps to swap and check their answers before checking The whole class as class. Key: 1.b 2.b 3.b 4.c 5.a 2. Read and write. Tell Ps that they are going to read the text and answer the Individually questions. Give Ps a few seconds to read the text in silence. Check comprehension and give feedback The whole class Get Ps time to do the task. Go around offer help, if Individually necessary. Get Ps to swap and check their answers before checking as a class. Write the correct answers on the board for Ps to Pairs work Nguyễn Thị Thanh Hương 4.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(49)</span> Tiểu học Tiên Cát 2015 - 2016 copy down their notebooks. Call some Pairs to read the read the questions and answer Pairs work aloud Key: 1. She is from England 2. She is nine years old 3. She can play the guitar and sing many Vietnamese songs. 4. She goes to music club on Wednesday. 3. Read and match. Tell Ps that they are going to read the sentences on the left The whole class and pair them with those on the right by drawing a line between them. Check understanding. Give Ps a few seconds to read the text in silence. Check comprehension. Group works Give Ps time to do the task. Go around offer help, if necessary. Get Ps to swap and check their answers before checking Pairs work as class. Do choral and individual repetition The whole class Key: 1. d 2. a 3. e 4. c 5. b 4. Look and write. Then say Tell Ps that they are going to look at the pictures and read T-The whole class the sentences then find out the suitable words to fill in the gaps. Give Ps a few seconds to read the text in silence. Pairs work Check comprehension and give feedback Get Ps time to do the task. Go around offer help, if The whole class necessary. Get Ps to swap and check their answers before checking Pairs work as a class. Write the correct answers on the board for Ps to copy down their notebooks. Call some Ps to read the text and sentences aloud Key: 1. America 2. the fifteenth of January 3. play badminton 4. Sunday 5. Write about you. Tell Ps that they are going to write themselves. Give Ps a Read then write about few seconds to read the paragraph. Call a few Ps and elicit themselves the words to fill in the gaps. Give Ps time to do the task. Go around offer help, if Individually necessary. Get Ps to swap and check their answers before checking Pairs work as class. Call a few Ps to read their sentences aloud Individually 4. Consolidation - Consolidate the content of the lesson 5. Homework - Do exercises in the workbook. Review modal sentences and vocabulary from unit 1 to unit 5 Nguyễn Thị Thanh Hương. 4.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(50)</span> Tiểu học Tiên Cát 2015 - 2016 th. th. Week 8: From 7 to 11 Oct ,2015 Preparing: 9/10/2015 Teaching: 12-16/10/2015. Period 32: Short story: cat and mouse 1 I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: - Help students to review all the structure from unit 1 to unit 5 - Review the words, do exercises in the book 2. Skills: - Develop Ss listening, reading, writing skills, do exercises in book 3. Language focus: - Sentence Partners: from unit 1 to unit 5 - Vocabulary: : from unit 1 to unit 5 II. Teaching methods: - Communicative approach. Techniques:+ Ask and answer (say individually) + Work in pairs/ groups. + Discuss. III. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. VI. Teaching processes: 1. Class organization: - Greeting - Checking for the students' attendance. 2. Oral test: - Check pupils: check sts' asking and answering questions about whether someone can do something 3. New lesson Teacher’s activities Ps’ activities Warm up: Sing a song The whole class 1. Read and listen to the story. Tell Ps that they are going to read and listen to the story The whole class cat and mouse . Give a few seconds for Ps to look at the pictures. Check comprehension and give feedback. T- WC Play the recording three times for Ps to answer T's questions The whole class 1. Who are they? -They are Miu, Maurice, Doris, Chit, Mimi 2. What are they doing? - They are playing cards. 3. At the end what are they doing? - They are dancing and singing 4. What can Mary do? - It can play the guitar. 5. What can Miu do? - It can play the piano. 6. Where is Mary from? - She's from America 2. Complete the conversation. Tell Ps that they are going to read the conversation and fill in the missing words using the information in part 1. The whole class Nguyễn Thị Thanh Hương 5.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(51)</span> Tiểu học Tiên Cát 2015 - 2016 Give Ps a few seconds to read the text in silence. Check comprehension and give feedback Get Ps time to do the task. Go around offer help, if Group works necessary. Get Ps to swap and check their answers before checking as a class. Write the correct answers on the board for Ps to Pairs work copy down their notebooks. Call some Pairs to read the read the questions and answer The whole class aloud Key: 1. Who 2. My name's 3. Yes, it is. 4. How are you? 5. I'm very well, thank you. 3. Work in group of three. Read the conversation. Then act it out with your own names. Tell Ps that they are going to read the conversation. Then T-The whole class act it out with your own names. Check understanding. Give Ps a few seconds to read the text in silence. Check Individually comprehension. Give Ps time to practice the tape in pairs. Go around offer Pairs work help, if necessary. 4. Unscramble these words from the conversation. Tell Ps that they are going to order the letters to make T-The whole class meaningful words. Get Ps time to do the task. Go around offer help, if necessary. Get Ps to swap and check their answers before checking Group works as a class. Write the correct answers on the board for Ps to copy down their notebooks. Call some Ps to read the words aloud Individually Key: a. house b. really c. nice d. friends e. guitar f. America 4. Consolidation - Consolidate the content of the lesson 5. Homework - Do exercises in the workbook. Review modal sentences and vocabulary from unit 1 to unit 5 ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------. Nguyễn Thị Thanh Hương. 5.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(52)</span> Tiểu học Tiên Cát 2015 - 2016 th. rd. Week 9: From 19 to 23 Oct, 2015 Preparing: 15/10/2015 Teaching: 19-23/10/2015. Period 33 REVIEW I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: - Help students to review all the structure from unit 1 to unit 5 - Review the words, do exercises in the book 2. Skills: - Develop Ss listening, reading, writing skills, do exercises in book 3. Language focus: - Sentence Partners: from unit 1 to unit 5 - Vocabulary: from unit 1 to unit 5 II.Teaching methods: - Communicative approach. Techniques:+ Ask and answer (say individually) + Work in pairs/ groups. + Discuss. III. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. VI. Teaching processes: 1. Class organization: - Greeting - Checking for the students' attendance. 2. Oral test: - Check pupils: check sts' asking and answering questions about whether someone can do something 3. New lesson Teacher’s activities Ps’ activities Warm up: tell the cat and mouse 1 story The whole class Exercise 1: Circle the odd one out 1. A. good morning B. goodnight C. good evening The whole class D. bored 2. A. where B. what C. name D. how 3. A. May B. Can C. August D. June 4. A. happy B. sing C. write D. read 5 A. Vietnamese B. China C. Chinese D. Japanese Exercise 2: Choose the best answer to complete the following sentences: Group works 1. Good morning.------are you? A. What B. How C. When D. Where 2. How are you? A. I’m bored B. She’s happy C. He’s OK D. You ‘re fine 3. What’s ……..name? A. her B. his C. your D. my 4. Where are you ……..? Nguyễn Thị Thanh Hương 5.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(53)</span> Tiểu học Tiên Cát 2015 - 2016 A. in B. on C. at D. from 5……….your birthday? A. What’s B. How is C. When’s D. Where’s 6. What……….. is it today? A. month B. day C. year D. time 7. What is ………….today? A. the B. date C. day D. the date 8. …………Mary swim? A. Can B. What C. When D. Do Exercise 3: Reorder the words to make sentences: 1. from/ where/ he/ is ? ……………………………………… 2. is /birthday /on /my/ September/ of/ sixteenth/ the. …………………………………………….. 3. date/ the/ what/ today/ is /?/ …………………………………………….. 4. you/ can / ride a bike/ ? / ……………………………………………. 5. hobby / is/ watching/ my / TV /. …………………………………………. 6. can/what/ Lan /do? ………………………………………… 7. Nationality/ what/Tom/is? …………………………………………. Individually. 4 .Consolidation - Consolidate the content of the lesson 5. Homework - Do exercises in the workbook. Review modal sentences and vocabulary from unit 1 to unit 5 ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Week 9: From 19th to 23rd Oct, 2015 Preparing: 15/10/2015 Teaching: 19-23/10/2015. Period 34 REVIEW I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: - Help students to review all the structure from unit 1 to unit 5 - Review the words, do exercises in the book 2. Skills: - Develop Ss listening, reading, writing skills, do exercises in book 3. Language focus: - Sentence Partners: from unit 1 to unit 5 - Vocabulary: : from unit 1 to unit 5 II. Teaching methods: - Communicative approach. Techniques: + Ask and answer (say individually) Nguyễn Thị Thanh Hương 5.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(54)</span> Tiểu học Tiên Cát 2015 - 2016 + Work in pairs/ groups. + Discuss. III. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. VI. Teaching processes: 1. Class organization: - Greeting - Checking for the students' attendance. 2. Oral test: - Check pupils: check sts' asking and answering questions about whether someone can do something 3. New lesson Teacher’s activities Ps’ activities Warm up: tell the cat and mouse 1 story The whole class Exercise 1: Write the answer with the questions. 1. What do you do on Tuesday? Pairs work …………………………………….. 2. What day is it tomorrow? ……………………………………….. 3. When’s your birthday? …………………………………………… 4. What’s the date today? ……………………………………… 5. What can you do? …………………………………….. 6. Where are you from? ………………………………………….. Exercise 2 Matching column A and column B Group works Column A Column B 1. How are you? a. I’m from England 2. When’s your birthday? b. I’m fine, thank you. 3. Where are you from ? c. She is Japanese 4. What can you do? d. It’s in May. 5. What do you do at the e. I can speak English. weekend? 6. What nationality is f. I visit my grandparents Akiko? Exercise 3 Trananslate the sentences Individually 1. Cô ấy có thể làm gì?-Cô ấy có thể chơi cờ. 2. Bạn có thể khiêu vũ không?-Không, Mình có thể hát 3. Hakim đến tờ đâu? -Bạn ấy đến từ Malaysia. 4. Quốc tịch bạn ấy là gì? - Bạn ấy là người Malaysia. 5. Hôm nay là thứ mấy? - Hôm nay là thứ bảy. 6. Bạn thường làm gì vào cuối tuần? - Mình thường giúp đỡ bố mẹ việc nhà. Nguyễn Thị Thanh Hương 5.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(55)</span> Tiểu học Tiên Cát 2015 - 2016 7. Sinh nhật của Linda vào khi nào? - Nó vào ngày mung 2 tháng 1 8. Hôm nay là ngày mấy? - Hôm nay là ngày 3 tháng 2. 4.Consolidation - Consolidate the content of the lesson 5. Homework - Do exercises in the workbook. Review modal sentences and vocabulary from unit 1 to unit 5 ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Week 9: From 19th to 23rd Oct, 2015 Preparing: 15/10/2015 Teaching: 19-23/10/2015. Period 35 REVIEW I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: - Help students to review all the structure from unit 1 to unit 5 - Review the words, do exercises in the book 2. Skills: - Develop Ss listening, reading, writing skills, do exercises in book 3. Language focus: - Sentence Partners: from unit 1 to unit 5 - Vocabulary: from unit 1 to unit 5 II. Teaching methods: - Communicative approach. Techniques: + Ask and answer (say individually) + Work in pairs/ groups. + Discuss. III. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. VI. Teaching processes: 1. Class organization: - Greeting - Checking for the students' attendance. 2. Oral test: - Check pupils: check sts' asking and answering questions about whether someone can do something 3. New lesson. Part I: Listening (20’) Question 1: Listen and number: (1 point). a. . Nguyễn Thị Thanh Hương. b. . 5. c.. 0.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(56)</span> Tiểu học Tiên Cát 2015 - 2016 d. . e.. . Question2 : Listen and match the number with the pictures. (1 point) E. A. B. D. C. 0. 1. 2. 3. 4. Question 3: Listen and tick the picture you hear. (1 point) Example: b.. a. 1.. a. 2.. a. a. 3.. b. b Question 4: Listen and write the missing words. (1 points) Example: A: Hello, I am Nam. b. 4.. . B: Hi, I am Linda. 1. I like _______________.. 3. Good _____________, Mr Green.. 2. A: Where is Yoko from?. 4. A: What is your hobby?. B: She’s from _________.. B: ________________.. Part II: Reading and writing ( 15 minutes ) Question 5: Look and read .Put a tick ( ) or a cross () in the box. (1 point). X. 0. They are skipping.. 1. My hobby is singing.. Nguyễn Thị Thanh Hương. 5. a b.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(57)</span> Tiểu học Tiên Cát 2015 - 2016 2. He can speak English.. 3. My birthday is in June. 4. Linda is from England Question 6: Look at the pictures. Read and write the words. (1 point) 0. It’s a pencil.. 1. I’m from Vietnam. I’m _________.. 2. What’s your hobby ?- Colleting _____. 3. They are from A___________. 4. She can __________________. Question 7: Look at the pictures and the letters. Write the words. (1 point). 0. uerlr. ruler. 1. slatauria. _________________. 2. gsnigni. ___________________. 3. pyhap. ___________________. ___________________. 4. cadginn. Question 8: Fill in each gap with a suitable word from the box. (1 point) Primary School June sing Vietnam name. Nguyễn Thị Thanh Hương. 5.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(58)</span> Tiểu học Tiên Cát 2015 - 2016 Hi. My ( 0 ) name is Nam. I’m from (1) _____________. I’m 11 years old. My birthday is in (2)__________. I study at Cong Hoa(3)__________. I like music very much. In my free time, I go to music club. I can (4)___________but I can’t play the piano. Transcripts Q1: Listen and number 1. What can you do? I can use a computer.. 1. Where is Quang from? He’s from Vietnam. 2. Mai is from Hanoi, Vietnam.. 2. Can you swim? Yes, I can.. 3. Happy birthday to you.. 3. When’s your birthday? It’s in January.. 4. His hobby is skipping.. 4. My hobby is dancing.. Q2: Listen and colour: 1.. I like flying a kite. I have a green one.. 2. I have a red car. 3. My brother likes collecting toys. He has a blue robot. 4. Is your book red? No, It isn’t. It’s yellow. Q3: Listen and match. 0 This is the bathroom. It is big.. Q4: Listen and tick 1. Can you dance? Yes, I can 2. Where are you from? I’m Japan. 3. Good night, Mum. 4. What can you do? I can fly a kite Q5: 1. 2. 3. 4.. Listen and write I like cooking. She is from Japan. Good evening, Mr Green. What is your hobby? Dancing.. Answer key: Q. Answer. 1. 1.b. 2.d. 3.a. 4.e. 2. 1. green. 2. red. 3. blue. 4. yellow. 3. 1.d. 2.a. 3.e. 4.c. 4. 1. b. 2. b. 3. a. 4. a. 5. 1. cooking. 2. Vietnam. 3. evening. 4. fly a kite. 6. 1. V. 2. X. 3. X. 4. V. 7. 1. Vietnamese. 2. toys. 3. America. 4. ride a bike. 8. 1. Australia. 2. singing. 3. happy. 4. dancing. 9. 1. Vietnam. 2. June. Nguyễn Thị Thanh Hương. 3. Primary School. 5. from. 4. sing.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(59)</span> Tiểu học Tiên Cát 2015 - 2016 4. Consolidation - Consolidate the content of the lesson 5. Homework - Do exercises in the workbook. Review modal sentences and vocabulary from unit 1 to unit 5 ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Week 9: From 19th to 23rd Oct, 2015 Preparing: 15/10/2015 Teaching: 19-23/10/2015 Unit 6: Where's your school? Period 36: Lesson 1 part 1+2 I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: - Asking and answering questions about where a school is 2. Skills: - Practice listening, speaking skills, do exercises in the book 3. Language focus: - Sentence Partners: Where's your school? - It's in/on…………….. - Vocabulary: street, road, village, district, study=learn, cousin, the same school II. Teaching methods: - Communicative approach. Techniques: + Ask and answer (say individually) + Work in pairs/ groups. + Discuss. III. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. VI. Teaching processes: 1. Class organization: - Greeting - Checking for the students' attendance. 2. Oral test: - Check pupils: ask S some questions about their own information 3. New lesson Teacher’s activities Ps’ activities Warm up Sing a song Sing the song 1. Look, listen and repeat. The whole class Tell Ps that they are going to practice asking and answering questions about where a school is, using Where's your The whole class school? - It's in/on….Draw Ps’ attention to the first picture and elicit the names of characters and what are they saying. Have Ps repeat the text a few times. Repeat the procedure Group works with the second picture. Do choral and individual repetition, pointing to the The whole class characters speaking. Play the recording for Ps to listen and say along. Have Ps to find out the new structure. Whole class repeats Individually it for several times The whole class 2. Point and say. Nguyễn Thị Thanh Hương. 5.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(60)</span> Tiểu học Tiên Cát 2015 - 2016 New words - Village ( example ) - Street ( Example ) - Primary school ( example) - Road - District: - study=learn: - cousin: - the same school ( translate) Model sentence Where is Trang An school?( Trường Tràng An là ở đâu?) It’s in Nguyen Du street.( Nó là ở phố Nguyễn Du) Tell Ps that they are going to practice asking and answering questions Where's your school? - It's in/on…Point to each picture and elicit the meaning of new words. Point to the first picture and elicit the word to fill the gap. Put the question and answer on the board and have Ps repeat them a few times. Do choral and individual repetition, using the pictures in the book. Get Ps to work in pairs to ask and answer the questions about their school ask its name and where it is. What is the name of your school? Where is your school? Check as a class.. Work in pairs The whole class The whole class. The whole class The whole class. Individually Work in pairs. 4. Consolidation - Consolidate the content of the lesson 5. Homework - Do exercises in the workbook. Learn by heart the new words and structure. Prepare the next lesson. ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------. Nguyễn Thị Thanh Hương. 6.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(61)</span> Tiểu học Tiên Cát 2015 - 2016 th. th. Week 10: From 26 to 30 Oct, 2015 Preparing: 15/10/2015 Teaching: 26-30/10/2015 Unit 6: Where's your school? Period 37: Lesson 1 part 3+4+5 I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: - Asking and answering questions about where a school is 2. Skills: - Practice listening, writing skills, do exercises in the book 3. Language focus: - Sentence Partners: Where's your school? - It's in/on…………….. - Vocabulary: street, road, village, district, study=learn, cousin, the same school II.Teaching methods: - Communicative approach. Techniques:+ Ask and answer (say individually) + Work in pairs/ group + Discuss. III. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. VI. Teaching processes: 1. Class organization: - Greeting - Checking for the students' attendance. 2. Oral test: - Check pupils: ask S some questions about where a school is 3. New lesson Teacher’s activities Ps’ activities Warm up Jumpled words Whole class 3. Listen and tick. The whole class Tell Ps that they are going to listen and tick the correct boxes. Give a few seconds for Ps to look at the pictures. The whole class Check comprehension and give feedback. Play the recording three times for Ps to listen, do the task and check their answers. Group works Get Ps to swap and check their answers before checking as class. The whole class Key: 1.c 2.a 3.c 4. Look and write. Tell Ps that they are going to look the pictures and find out The whole class the suitable words to fill the gaps. Give Ps a few seconds to read the text in silence. Check comprehension and give feedback Get Ps time to do the task. Go around offer help, if Individually necessary. Get Ps to swap and check their answers before checking as Work in pairs a class. Write the correct answers on the board for Ps to The whole class copy down their notebooks. Call some Ps to read the text and sentences aloud Nguyễn Thị Thanh Hương. 6.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(62)</span> Tiểu học Tiên Cát 2015 - 2016 2. in Van Noi village. Key: 1. Nguyen Trai street 3. in South street London 5. Let’s sing. Tell Ps that they are going to sing the This is the way song. T- The whole class Read each line and check comprehension. Sing each line and have Ps repeat it. When Ps are familiar with the tune, ask them to sing and do the actions. Ask groups of Ps to sit face to face and practice singing and Group works doing the actions. Call a group of five to sing the song and do the actions. Have the whole sing the song and do the actions. The whole class 4. Consolidation - Consolidate the content of the lesson 5. Homework - Do exercises in the workbook. Learn by heart the new words and structure. Prepare the next lesson. ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Week 10: From 26th to 30th Oct, 2015 Preparing: 15/10/2015 Teaching: 26-30/10/2015 Unit 6: Where's your school? Period 38: Lesson 2 part 1+2+3 I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: - Asking and answering questions about what class someone is in 2. Skills: - Practice listening, speaking skills, do exercises in the book 3. Language focus: - Sentence Partners: What class are you in? - I'm in class…………….. - Vocabulary: What class, class, in II. Teaching methods: - Communicative approach. Techniques: + Ask and answer (say individually) + Work in pairs/ groups. + Discuss. III. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. VI. Teaching processes: 1. Class organization: - Greeting - Checking for the students' attendance. 2. Oral test: - Check pupils: ask S some questions about where a school is 3. New lesson Teacher’s activities Ps’ activities Warm up Order the words Some students 1.Look, listen and repeat. Tell Ps that they are going to practice asking and answering The whole class Nguyễn Thị Thanh Hương 6.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(63)</span> Tiểu học Tiên Cát 2015 - 2016 questions about what class someone is in, using What class are you in? - I'm in class…Draw Ps’ attention to the first The whole class picture and elicit the names of characters and the activities. Have Ps repeat the text a few times. Repeat the procedure with the second picture. Give feedback and check the new The whole class vocabulary. Play the recording for Ps to listen and say along. Have Ps to find out the new structure. Whole class repeat it The whole class for several times 2. Point and say. New words T- WC What class: Class: In: Model sentences: What class are you in? - I'm in class… Tell Ps that they are going to practice asking and answering questions What class are you in? - I'm in class… Point to T- WC each picture and elicit the meaning of new words. Point to the first picture and elicit the word to fill the gap. Put the question and answer on the board and have Ps repeat them a few times. The whole class Do choral and individual repetition, using the pictures in the book. Get Ps to work in pairs. Check as a class. 3. Let’s talk Work in pairs Tell Ps that they are going to practice more with their friends about their own information using the questions. The whole class Questions: What's the name of your school? Where is it? What class are you in? Call a pair to give a demonstration of the dialogue before starting the activity. Work in pairs Have Ps work in pairs. Go around offer help and correct the pronunciation, if necessary. Call a few pairs to act out the dialogue in front of the class. Work in pairs T corrects Ss' mistakes if necessary. 4. Consolidation - Consolidate the content of the lesson 5. Homework - Do exercises in the workbook. Learn by heart the new words and structurePrepare the next lesson. ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------. Nguyễn Thị Thanh Hương. 6.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(64)</span> Tiểu học Tiên Cát 2015 - 2016 th. th. Week 10: From 26 to 30 Oct, 2015 Preparing: 15/10/2015 Teaching : 26-30/10/2015 Unit 6: Where's your school? Period 39: Lesson 2 part 4+5+6 I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: - Asking and answering questions about what class someone is in 2. Skills: - Practice listening, writing skills, do exercises in the book 3. Language focus: - Sentence Partners: What class are you in? - I'm in class…………….. - Vocabulary: What class, class, in II.Teaching methods: - Communicative approach. Techniques:+ Ask and answer (say individually) + Work in pairs/ groups. + Discuss. III. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. VI. Teaching processes: 1. Class organization: - Greeting - Checking for the students' attendance. 2. Oral test: - Check pupils: ask S some questions about what class someone is in 3. New lesson Teacher’s activities Ps’ activities Warm up Ask two Ss to red the text in part 1 p42 Pairs work 4. Listen and number Tell Ps that they are going to listen and number the The whole class pictures. Give a few seconds for Ps to look at the pictures. Check comprehension and give feedback. Play the recording three times for Ps to listen, do the task Individually and check their answers. Get Ps to swap and check their answers before checking as The whole class class. Key a.3 b.1 c.4 d.2 5. Look and write. Tell Ps that they are going to look the pictures and find out The whole class the suitable information to fill in the blanks. Give Ps a few seconds to read the text in silence. Check comprehension T- WC and give feedback Get Ps time to do the task. Go around to offer help, if Pair works necessary. Get Ps to swap and check their answers before checking as Pair works a class. Write the correct answers on the board for Ps to copy down their notebooks. Call some Ps to read questions and answers Pair works Nguyễn Thị Thanh Hương. 6.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(65)</span> Tiểu học Tiên Cát 2015 - 2016 2. on South street London 4. in class 4C T- WC. Key: 1. Chu Van An street 3. class 4B 6. Let’s play - Explain how the game Pass the secret is played: Divide class into three groups. Then whisper the first P in each row The whole class a sentence, eg: My school is Nguyen Trai primary school. the first P then whispers the sentence to the second one. the Group works last P in the row say aloud the sentence he/ she heard. The group that says the teacher's sentence correctly in the shortest time will win the game. To make the game more competitive, you can select some Ps to act as teachers and whisper sentences to the first Ps in the rows. These Ps should say something they have learnt from lesson 1 to 2, and they have to whisper the sentences to the row a at same time. 4. Consolidation - Consolidate the content of the lesson 5. Homework - Do exercises in the workbook. Learn by heart the new words and structure. Prepare the next lesson. -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Week 10: From 26th to 30th Oct, 2015 Preparing: 15/10/2015 Teaching : 26-30/10/2015 Unit 6: Where's your school? Period 40: Lesson 3 part 1+2+3 I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: - Asking and answering questions about what class someone is in and where a school is… and pronounce correctly the sound of the letters sch and those of the letters str, sk 2. Skills: - Practice listening, speaking skills, do exercises in the book 3. Language focus: - Sentence Partners: - Vocabulary: stream, beautiful, long, short II. Teaching methods: - Communicative approach. Techniques: + Ask and answer (say individually) + Work in pairs/ groups. + Discuss. III. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. VI. Teaching processes: 1. Class organization: - Greeting - Checking for the students' attendance. 2. Oral test: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Hương. 6.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(66)</span> Tiểu học Tiên Cát 2015 - 2016 - Check pupils: ask S some questions about what class someone is in 3. New lesson Teacher’s activities Ps’ activivties Warm up Play game Pass the secret Group work 1. Listen and repeat. Tell Ps that they are going to practice saying the letters, The whole class words, sentences in the book. Put the phonics letters sch and those of the letters str, sk on the board and say them a few times. Ask Ps to repeat after you. Prompt Ps to say the Individually words and sentences, paying attention to the target phonics letters. Do chorally repetition of the words and sentences The whole class unit Ps feel confident. 2. Listen and circle. Then write and say aloud New words The whole class Stream: Beautiful: Individually Long: short Tell Ps that they are going to do a dictation. Give Ps a few T- WC seconds Ps a few seconds to read the sentences in the silence before starting the guessing. Get Ps to swap and check their answers before checking as Pair works class. Write the correct answers on the board for Ps to copy down their notebooks. Get Ps to work in pairs and practice saying sentences. T- WC Key: 1.b 2. b 3. b 4. a 5.a 3. Let’s chant. Tell Ps that they are going to say the School, school, school Whole class chant. Say the chant and check comprehension. Have Ps repeat every line of the chant. When they are familiar with Group works the rhythm, show them how to say the chant and do the actions. Divide the class into three groups to say the chant. Get groups of Ps to sit face to face and practice chanting Group works and doing the actions. Get around and offer help, if The whole class necessary. Call two groups to the front of the class to chant. The whole class claps along the rhythm. 4. Consolidation - Consolidate the content of the lesson 5. Homework - Do exercises in the workbook. Learn by heart the new words and structurePrepare the next lesson. ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------. Nguyễn Thị Thanh Hương. 6.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(67)</span> Tiểu học Tiên Cát 2015 - 2016 nd. th. Week 11: From 2 to 6 Nov, 2015 Preparing: 20/10/2015 Teaching: 2-6/11/2015 Unit 6: Where's your school? Period 41: Lesson 3 part 4+5+6 I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: - Asking and answering questions about what class someone is in and where a school is 2. Skills: - Practice reading, writing skills, do exercises in the book 3. Language focus: - Sentence Partners: - Vocabulary: address, study, study at, card, Vietnamese II. Teaching methods: - Communicative approach. Techniques: + Ask and answer (say individually) + Work in pairs/ groups. + Discuss. III. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. VI. Teaching processes: 1. Class organization: - Greeting - Checking for the students' attendance. 2. Oral test: - Check pupils: ask S some questions about what class someone is in 3. New lesson Teacher’s activities Ps’ activities Warm up Sing the chant School, school, school Sing the chant 4. Read and complete. New words: Address Study The whole class study at Card Tell Ps that they are going to read the student's card of Mai Individually the fill the right information about her in the text. Check understanding. Give Ps a few seconds to read the text in The whole class silence. Check comprehension. Give Ps time to do the task. Go around offer help, if Group works necessary. Get Ps to swap and check their answers before checking as T- WC class. Do choral and individual repetition The whole class 5. Write about you. Tell Ps that they are going to write themselves. Give Ps a T- WC few seconds to read the text. Call a few Ps and elicit the words to fill in the gaps. Give Ps time to do the task. Go around offer help, if Individually necessary. Nguyễn Thị Thanh Hương. 6.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(68)</span> Tiểu học Tiên Cát 2015 - 2016 Get Ps to swap and check their answers before checking as class. Call a few Ps to read their answer aloud T- WC 6. Project. Tell Ps that they are going to make a small card. Let Ps Whole class copy the four categories from the book onto their cards. Encourage them to decorate their cards. Pairs work Ask them to interview on of their friends (in another school, if possible), using the questions What's your name? What's the name of your school? Where's your school? What class are you in? and write the information on the card. Get them to swap their cards in pairs. They should look at their partners' cards and describe the partners' friends Call some Ps to the front of the class and tell the class about their partners' friends. To make this activity more challenging, ask them not to look at the cards. 4 .Consolidation - Consolidate the content of the lesson 5. Homework - Do exercises in the workbook. Learn by heart the new words and structure. Prepare the next lesson. ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Week 11: From 2nd to 6th Nov, 2015 Preparing: 20/10/2015 Teaching: 2-6/11/2015 Unit 7: What do you like doing? Period 42: Lesson 1 part 1+2 I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: - Asking and answering questions about what someone like doing 2. Skills: - Practice speaking, listening skills, do exercises in the book 3. Language focus: - Sentence Partners: What do you like doing?- I like…… - Vocabulary: swimming, cooking, collecting stamps, reading comic books II. Teaching methods: - Communicative approach. Techniques: + Ask and answer (say individually) + Work in pairs/ groups. + Discuss. III. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. VI. Teaching processes: 1. Class organization: - Greeting - Checking for the students' attendance. 2. Oral test: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Hương. 6.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(69)</span> Tiểu học Tiên Cát 2015 - 2016 - Check pupils: ask S some questions about what class someone is in 3. New lesson Teacher’s activities Ps’ activities Warm up Sing the chant School, school, school Sing the chant 1. Look, listen and repeat. Tell Ps that they are going to practice asking and answering The whole class questions about what someone like doing, using What do you like doing?- I like…… Draw Ps’ attention to the first Individually picture and elicit the names of characters and what are they saying. Have Ps repeat the text a few times. Repeat the The whole class procedure with the second picture. Do choral and individual repetition, pointing to the Group works characters speaking. Play the recording for Ps to listen and say along. T- WC Have Ps to find out the new structure. Whole class repeats it for several times 2. Point and say. New words The whole class Swimming cooking collecting stamps reading comic books Sentence Partners: What do you like doing?- I like…… Chủ ngữ : he, she, I, we + like(s) + V-ing Tell Ps that they are going to practice asking and answering T- WC questions What do you like doing?- I like……Point to each picture and elicit the meaning of new words. Point to the Whole class first picture and elicit the word to fill the gap. Put the question and answer on the board and have Ps repeat them a few times. Do choral and individual repetition, using the pictures in T- WC the book. Get Ps to work in pairs. Check as a class. Whole class Ask Ss to practise about what they like doing. T corrects Ss Pairs work mistake if necessary. 4 .Consolidation - Consolidate the content of the lesson 5. Homework - Do exercises in the workbook. Learn by heart the new words and structure. Prepare the next lesson. ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------. Nguyễn Thị Thanh Hương. 6.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(70)</span> Tiểu học Tiên Cát 2015 - 2016 Week 11: From 2nd to 6th Nov, 2015 Preparing: 20/10/2015 Teaching: 2-6/11/2015 Unit 7: What do you like doing? Period 43: Lesson 1 part 3+4+5 I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: - Asking and answering questions about what someone like doing 2. Skills: - Practice writing, listening skills, do exercises in the book 3. Language focus: - Sentence Partners: What do you like doing?- I like…… - Vocabulary: swimming, cooking, collecting stamps, reading comic books II. Teaching methods: - Communicative approach. Techniques:+ Ask and answer (say individually) + Work in pairs/ groups. + Discuss. III. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. VI. Teaching processes: 1. Class organization: - Greeting - Checking for the students' attendance. 2. Oral test: - Check pupils: ask S some questions about what they like doing 3. New lesson Teacher’s activities Ps’ activities Warm up Slap the board read fly a kite play chess eat dance Groups collect stamps watch TV cook 3. Listen and tick. Tell Ps that they are going to listen and tick the correct boxes. T-WC Give a few seconds for Ps to look at the pictures. Check comprehension and give feedback. Play the recording three times for Ps to listen, do the task and The whole class check their answers. Get Ps to swap and check their answers before checking as Pair work class. Key: 1.b 2.c 3.a 4. Look and write. Tell Ps that they are going to look the pictures read the T-WC sentences, name the activities in them then fill the gaps. Give Ps a few seconds to read the text in silence. Check comprehension The whole class and give feedback Get Ps time to do the task. Go around offer help, if necessary. Groups Get Ps to swap and check their answers before checking as a class. Write the correct answers on the board for Ps to copy Nguyễn Thị Thanh Hương. 7.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(71)</span> Tiểu học Tiên Cát 2015 - 2016 Individually. down their notebooks. Call some Ps to read the text and sentences aloud Key: 1. playing football 2. playing chess The whole class 3. reading 4. collecting stamps 6. Let’s sing. Tell Ps that they are going to sing the I like doing things song. T-WC Read each line and check comprehension. Sing each line and have Ps repeat it. When Ps are familiar with the tune, ask them The whole class to sing and do the actions. Ask groups of Ps to sit face to face and practice singing and Groups doing the actions. Call a group of five to sing the song and do the actions. Have the whole sing the song and do the actions. The whole class 4. Consolidation - Consolidate the content of the lesson 5. Homework - Do exercises in the workbook. Learn by heart the new words and structure. Prepare the next lesson. ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Week 11: From 2nd to 6th Nov, 2015 Preparing: 20/10/2015 Teaching: 2-6/11/2015 Unit 7: What do you like doing? Period 44: Lesson 2 part 1+2+3 I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: - Asking and answering questions about someone's hobbies 2. Skills: - Practice speaking, listening skills, do exercises in the book 3. Language focus: - Sentence Partners: What's your hobby? - I like……/ My hobby is…… - Vocabulary: riding a bike, playing badminton, flying a kite, taking photos, watching TV II. Teaching methods: - Communicative approach. Techniques: + Ask and answer (say individually) + Work in pairs/ groups. + Discuss. III. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. VI. Teaching processes: 1. Class organization: - Greeting - Checking for the students' attendance. 2. Oral test:- Check pupils: ask S some questions about what they like doing 3. New lesson Teacher’s activities Ps’ activities Warm up Nguyễn Thị Thanh Hương 7.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(72)</span> Tiểu học Tiên Cát 2015 - 2016 Individually The whole class. English words Vietnamese a. cooking 1. Bơi b. swimming 2. nhảy dây c. skipping 3. nấu ăn d. reading 4. đọc sách - Ask ps match English words and Vietnamese 1. Look, listen and repeat. T- WC Tell Ps that they are going to practice asking and answering questions about someone's hobbies, using What's your hobby? The whole class I like…/ My hobby is… Draw Ps’ attention to the first picture and elicit the names of characters and the activities. Have Ps The whole class repeat the text a few times. Repeat the procedure with the second picture. Give feedback and check the new vocabulary. Play the recording for Ps to listen and say along. The whole class Have Ps to find out the new structure. Whole class repeat it for several times 2. Point and say. New words: riding a bike playing badminton T- WC flying a kite taking photos watching TV hobby Sentence Partners What's your hobby? - I like……/ My hobby is…… Tell Ps that they are going to practice asking and answering The whole class questions What's your hobby? - I like…/ My hobby is… Point to each picture and elicit the meaning of new words. Point to the first picture and elicit the word to fill the gap. Put the question and answer on the board and have Ps repeat them a few The whole class times. Do choral and individual repetition, using the pictures in the Work in pair book. Get Ps to work in pairs. Check as a class. 3. Let’s talk The whole class Tell Ps that they are going to practice more with their friends about their hobby. Give a few seconds for Ps to read the questions and check comprehension. Call a pair to give a demonstration of the dialogue before starting the activity. Work in pair Have Ps work in pairs. Go around offer help and correct the pronunciation, if necessary. Call a few pairs to act out the dialogue in front of the class. 4. Consolidation - Consolidate the content of the lesson 5. Homework - Do exercises in the workbook. Learn by heart the new words and structure. Prepare the next lesson.. Nguyễn Thị Thanh Hương. 7.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(73)</span> Tiểu học Tiên Cát 2015 - 2016 th. th. Week 12: From 9 to 13 Nov, 2015 Preparing: 25/10/2015 Teaching: 9-13/11/2015 Unit 7: What do you like doing? Period 45: Lesson 2 part 4+5+6 I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: - Asking and answering questions about someone's hobbies 2. Skills: - Practice writing, listening skills, do exercises in the book 3. Language focus: - Sentence Partners: What's your hobby? - I like……/ My hobby is…… - Vocabulary: riding a bike, playing badminton, flying a kite, taking photos, watching TV II. Teaching methods: - Communicative approach. Techniques:+ Ask and answer (say individually) + Work in pairs/ groups. + Discuss. III. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. VI. Teaching processes: 1. Class organization: - Greeting - Checking for the students' attendance. 2. Oral test: - Check pupils: ask S some questions about what someone's hobbies 3. New lesson Warm up hobb Individually The whole class y 4. Listen and number Tell Ps that they are going to listen and number the pictures. Give a few seconds for Ps to look at the pictures. Check comprehension and give feedback. Play the recording three times for Ps to listen, do the task and check their answers. Get Ps to swap and check their answers before checking as class. Key a.2 b.4 c.1 d.3 5. Look and write. Tell Ps that they are going to look at the pictures, name the activities in them then read the sentences and fill the gaps. Give Ps a few seconds to read the text in silence. Check comprehension and give feedback Get Ps time to do the task. Go around to offer help, if necessary. Get Ps to swap and check their answers before checking as a class. Write the correct answers on the board for Ps to copy Nguyễn Thị Thanh Hương. 7. T- WC The whole class Pair work The whole class T- WC The whole class Group works.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(74)</span> Tiểu học Tiên Cát 2015 - 2016 down their notebooks. Call some Ps to read the sentences The whole class Key: 1. riding a bike/ cycling 2. flying a kite 3. taking photos 4. playing badminton Work in pair 6. Let’s play - Explain how the game What's your hobby? is played: Divide The whole class the class into three groups. One P in group A will mine one of the phrases on the board. Eg: playing football and ask What's my hobby? The other groups guess the hobby, put a tick next to Playing football on the board and say You like playing football. Work in group The Ps of group A will say Yes, that's right/ No, that's wrong. The quickest group put a tick next to correct phrase on the board say correct sentence will get five points. The group that gets the most points wins. 4. Consolidation - Consolidate the content of the lesson 5. Homework - Do exercises in the workbook. Learn by heart the new words and structure. Prepare the next lesson. ___________________________________________________________________ Week 12: From 9th to 13th Nov, 2015 Preparing: 25/10/2015 Teaching:9-13/11/2015 Unit 7: What do you like doing? Period 46: Lesson 2 part 4+5+6 I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: - Asking and answering questions about someone's hobbies and some one like doing, pronounce correctly the sounds of the letter fl and pl 2. Skills: - Practice speaking, listening skills, do exercises in the book 3. Language focus: - Sentence Partners: What's your hobby? - I like……/ My hobby is…… - Vocabulary: Sailing a boat, Playing with a yo-yo, Flying a plane II. Teaching methods: - Communicative approach. Techniques: + Ask and answer (say individually) + Work in pairs/ groups. + Discuss. III. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. VI. Teaching processes: 1. Class organization: - Greeting - Checking for the students' attendance. 2. Oral test: - Check pupils: ask S some questions about what someone's hobbies 3. New lesson Nguyễn Thị Thanh Hương. 7.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(75)</span> Tiểu học Tiên Cát 2015 - 2016 Teacher’s activities. Ps’ activities. Warm up Remember the words. swim sing play. fly dance write read draw ride. Individually. 1. Listen and repeat. Tell Ps that they are going to practice saying the letters, words, T- WC sentences in the book. Put the phonics letters fl and bl on the board and say them a few times. Ask Ps to repeat after you. Prompt Ps to say the words and sentences, paying attention to the target phonics letters. Do chorally repetition of the words The whole class and sentences unit Ps feel confident. 2. Listen and circle. Then write and say aloud New words: T- WC Sailing a boat: Playing with a yo-yo: Flying a plane: Tell Ps that they are going to do a dictation. Give Ps a few Pairs work seconds Ps a few seconds to read the in the silence before starting the dictation. Get Ps to swap and check their answers before checking as class. Write the correct answers on the board for Ps to copy Individually down their notebooks. Get Ps to work in pairs and practice saying sentences. The whole class Key: 1.b 2. a 3. b 4. a 3. Let’s chant. Tell Ps that they are going to say the Flying a little kite chant. T-WC Say the chant and check comprehension. Have Ps repeat every line of the chant. When they are familiar with the rhythm, show The whole class them how to say the chant and do the actions. Divide the class into three groups to say the chant. Get groups of Ps to sit face to face and practice chanting and Groups doing the actions. Get around and offer help, if necessary. Call two groups to the front of the class to chant. The whole Groups class claps along the rhythm. 4. Consolidation - Consolidate the content of the lesson 5. Homework - Do exercises in the workbook. Learn by heart the new words and structurePrepare the next lesson. ___________________________________________________________________. Nguyễn Thị Thanh Hương. 7.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(76)</span> Tiểu học Tiên Cát 2015 - 2016 th. th. Week 12: From 9 to 13 Nov, 2015 Preparing: 25/10/2015 Teaching :9-13/11/2015 Unit 7: What do you like doing? Period 47: Lesson 3 part 4+5+6 I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: - Asking and answering questions about someone's hobbies and some one like doing, pronounce correctly the sounds of the letter fl and pl 2. Skills: - Practice reading, writing skills, do exercises in the book 3. Language focus: - Sentence Partners: What's your hobby? - I like……/ My hobby is…… - Vocabulary: stamps, photo, want, of, pen friend II. Teaching methods: - Communicative approach. Techniques:+ Ask and answer (say individually) + Work in pairs/ groups. + Discuss. III. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. VI. Teaching processes: 1. Class organization: - Greeting - Checking for the students' attendance. 2. Oral test: - Check pupils: ask S some questions about what someone's hobbies 3. New lesson Teacher’s activities Ps’ activities Warm up Sing the chant Flying a little kite The whole class 4. Read and complete. New words: T-WC Stamps: photo Want of pen friend Tell Ps that they are going to read the text and complete the The whole class sentences below. Check understanding. Give Ps a few seconds to read the text in silence. Check comprehension. Give Ps time to do the task. Go around offer help, if necessary. Group works Get Ps to swap and check their answers before checking as class. Do choral and individual repetition Key: 1. nine 2. collecting stamps Individually 3. playing chess 4. pen friend 5. Write about you. The whole class Tell Ps that they are going to write themselves. Give Ps a few seconds to read the letter in part 4. Add their photos and write T- WC reply email to Mai. Give Ps time to do the task. Go around to Nguyễn Thị Thanh Hương. 7.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(77)</span> Tiểu học Tiên Cát 2015 - 2016 offer help, if necessary. Get Ps to swap and check their answers before checking as class. Call a few Ps to read their sentences aloud 6. Project. Tell Ps that they are going to collect things that they like and show them to their classmates, and tell their hobbies. Ex: I like collecting stamps. Encourage them to collect difference things. You may give them more suggestions Eg: bookmark, leaves, key chains,… In the next lesson, have Ps show things they have collected to their classmates and talk about their hobbies.. Individually The whole class T-WC Groups. 4. Consolidation - Consolidate the content of the lesson 5. Homework - Do exercises in the workbook. Learn by heart the new words and structurePrepare the next lesson. ___________________________________________________________________ Week 12: From 9th to 13th Nov, 2015 Preparing: 25/10/2015 Teaching: 9-13/11/2015 Unit 8: What subjects do you have today? Period 48 Lesson 1 Part 1+2 I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: - Asking and answering questions about school subjects 2. Skills: - Practice speaking, listening skills, do exercises in the book 3. Language - Sentence Partners: What subjects do you have today? - I have….. - Vocabulary: Maths, science, IT, art, music, Vietnamese, subject II.Teaching methods: - Communicative approach. Techniques:+ Ask and answer (say individually) + Work in pairs/ groups. + Discuss. III. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. VI. Teaching processes: 1. Class organization: - Greeting - Checking for the students' attendance. 2. Oral test: - Check pupils: ask S some questions about what someone's hobbies 3. New lesson Teacher’s activities Pupils’ activities Warm up Some students Subjects Nguyễn Thị Thanh Hương. 7.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(78)</span> Tiểu học Tiên Cát 2015 - 2016 - Ask ps give some subjects they learn 1. Look, listen and repeat. T- WC Tell Ps that they are going to practice asking and answering questions about school subjects, using What subjects do Individually you have today? - I have….. Draw Ps’ attention to the first picture and elicit the names of characters and what are they saying. Have Ps repeat the text a few times. Repeat the The whole class procedure with the second picture. Do choral and individual repetition, pointing to the characters speaking. Play the recording for Ps to listen and say along. The whole class Have Ps to find out the new structure. Whole class repeats it for several times Individually 2. Point and say. New words: Maths (n) ( Real) Music (n) (picture) T-WC Vietnamese (real) Science ( picture) Art (real) Subject IT(Information Technology)( real) Sentence Partners: What subjects do you have today? - I have….. Tell Ps that they are going to practice asking and answering Work in pairs questions What subjects do you have today? - I have….. Point to each picture and elicit the meaning of new words. Point to the first picture and elicit the word to fill the gap. Put the question and answer on the board and have Ps The whole class repeat them a few times. Do choral and individual repetition, using the pictures in Individually the book. Get Ps to work in pairs. Check as a class. Ask Ss to ask and answer about what subjects they have Work in pair today 4. Consolidation - Consolidate the content of the lesson 5. Homework - Do exercises in the workbook. Learn by heart the new words and structure Prepare the next lesson.. Nguyễn Thị Thanh Hương. 7.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(79)</span> Tiểu học Tiên Cát 2015 - 2016 th. th. Week 13: From 16 to 20 Nov, 2015 Preparing: 10/11/2015 Teaching:16-20/11/2015 Unit 8: What subjects do you have today? Period 49 Lesson 1 Part 3+4+5 I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: - Asking and answering questions about school subjects 2. Skills: - Practice writing, listening skills, do exercises in the book 3. Language - Sentence Partners: What subjects do you have today? - I have….. - Vocabulary: Maths, science, IT, art, music, Vietnamese, subject II. Teaching methods: - Communicative approach. Techniques: + Ask and answer (say individually) + Work in pairs/ groups. + Discuss. III. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. VI. Teaching processes: 1. Class organization: - Greeting - Checking for the students' attendance. 2. Oral test: - Check pupils: ask S some questions about what subjects they have today 3. New lesson Teacher’s activities Pupils’activities Warm up Ask ps write some new words and read them aloud T- WC 4. Listen and tick. Tell Ps that they are going to listen and tick the correct T-WC boxes. Give a few seconds for Ps to look at the pictures. Check comprehension and give feedback. Individually Play the recording three times for Ps to listen, do the task and check their answers. Get Ps to swap and check their answers before checking as The whole class class. Key: 1.b 2.a 3.c 5. Look and write. Tell Ps that they are going to look the pictures name the T-WC subjects, read the sentences and fill the gaps. Give Ps a few seconds to read the text in silence. Check comprehension and give feedback Get Ps time to do the task. Go around offer help, if necessary. Group work Get Ps to swap and check their answers before checking as a class. Write the correct answers on the board for Ps to copy down their notebooks. The whole class Call some Ps to read the text and sentences aloud Key: 1. Monday/ Vietnamese, Science and English Nguyễn Thị Thanh Hương. 7.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(80)</span> Tiểu học Tiên Cát 2015 - 2016 2. Wednesday/ Maths, IT and music 3. Friday/ Maths, Science and Art 6. Let’s sing. Tell Ps that they are going to sing the What day is it today? song. Read each line and check comprehension. Sing each T- WC line and have Ps repeat it. When Ps are familiar with the tune, ask them to sing and do the actions. The whole class Ask groups of Ps to sit face to face and practice singing and doing the actions. Call a group of five to sing the song and do Groups the actions. Have the whole sing the song and do the actions. Groups 4. Consolidation - Consolidate the content of the lesson 5. Homework - Do exercises in the workbook. Learn by heart the new words and structure Prepare the next lesson. _____________________________________________________________ Week 13: From 16th to 20th Nov, 2015 Preparing: 10/11/2015 Teaching:16-20/11/2015 Unit 8: What subjects do you have today? Period 50 Lesson 2 Part 1+2+3 I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: - Asking and answering questions about when someone has a subject 2. Skills: - Practice speaking, listening skills, do exercises in the book 3. Language - Sentence Partners: When do you have Science? - I have it on….. - Vocabulary: PE(physical education), Maths teacher, English teacher, II. Teaching methods: - Communicative approach. Techniques:+ Ask and answer (say individually) + Work in pairs/ groups. + Discuss. III. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. VI. Teaching processes: 1. Class organization: - Greeting - Checking for the students' attendance. 2. Oral test: - Check pupils: ask S some questions about what subjects they have today 3. New lesson Teacher’s activities Pupils’ activivties Warm up Art Math Musi Slap the board T- WC s c Englis Vietnames I English Nguyễn Thị Thanh Hương 8.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(81)</span> Tiểu học Tiên Cát 2015 - 2016 Maths PE Science Science 1. Look, listen and repeat. Music Tell Ps that they are going to practice asking and answering questions about when someone has a subject, using When do you have Science? - I have it on…..Draw Ps’ attention to T- WC the first picture and elicit the names of characters and the activities. Have Ps repeat the text a few times. Repeat the The whole class procedure with the second picture. Give feedback and check the new vocabulary. Play the recording for Ps to listen and say along. The whole class Have Ps to find out the new structure. Whole class repeat it for several times 2. Point and say. Individually Vocabulary: PE(physical education), Maths teacher, English teacher Sentence Partners: When do you have Science? - I have it on….. T-WC Tell Ps that they are going to practice asking and answering questions When do you have Science? - I have it on…. Point to each picture and elicit the meaning of new words. The whole class Point to the first picture and elicit the word to fill the gap. Put the question and answer on the board and have Ps repeat them a few times. The whole class Do choral and individual repetition, using the pictures in the book. Get Ps to work in pairs. Check as a class. 3. Let’s talk Tell Ps that they are going to practice more with their Work in pairs friends. Give a few seconds for Ps to read the questions and check comprehension. Call a pair to give a demonstration of the dialogue before starting the activity. T- WC Have Ps work in pairs. Go around offer help and correct the pronunciation, if necessary. Call a few pairs to act out the dialogue in front of the class. Work in pairs Use the questions: What subject do you have today? When do you have….? Who is your…. teacher? Correct Ss mistake if necessary 4. Consolidation - Consolidate the content of the lesson 5. Homework - Do exercises in the workbook. Learn by heart the new words and structurePrepare the next lesson.. Nguyễn Thị Thanh Hương. 8.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(82)</span> Tiểu học Tiên Cát 2015 - 2016 th. th. Week 13: From 16 to 20 Nov, 2015 Preparing: 10/11/2015 Teaching :16-20/11/2015 Unit 8: What subjects do you have today? Period 51 Lesson 2 part 4+5+6 I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: - Asking and answering questions about when someone has a subject 2. Skills: - Practice speaking, listening skills, do exercises in the book 3. Language - Sentence Partners: When do you have Science? - I have it on….. - Vocabulary: PE(physical education), Maths teacher, English teacher, II. Teaching methods: - Communicative approach. Techniques:+ Ask and answer (say individually) + Work in pairs/ groups. + Discuss. III. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. VI. Teaching processes: 1. Class organization: - Greeting - Checking for the students' attendance. 2. Oral test: - Check pupils: ask S some questions about when someone has a subject 3. New lesson Teacher’s activities Pupils’ activivties Warm up Sing the song: What day is it today? The whole class 4. Listen and number Tell Ps that they are going to listen and number the pictures. Give a few seconds for Ps to look at the pictures. Check comprehension and give feedback. Individually Play the recording three times for Ps to listen, do the task and check their answers. The whole class Get Ps to swap and check their answers before checking as class. Key a.3 b.4 c.1 d.2 Work in pair 5. Look and write. Tell Ps that they are going to look at the table, read the T-WC content and complete the text. Give Ps a few seconds to read the text in silence. Check comprehension and give The whole class feedback Get Ps time to do the task. Go around offer help, if Groups necessary. Get Ps to swap and check their answers before checking as a class. Write the correct answers on the board for Ps to copy down their notebooks. Call some Ps to read the text they have finished Individually Nguyễn Thị Thanh Hương. 8.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(83)</span> Tiểu học Tiên Cát 2015 - 2016 6. Let’s play - Explain how the game Puzzles is played: P look at the T-WC word subjects, and the rows of boxes from 1 to 5. Have Ps think about the name of these subjects bearing one letter of The whole class the word subjects and complete the puzzle, using one letter per box. Do number 1 as an example: science Ask Ps to work in pair to discuss the possible answers. Go Pair work around offer help, if necessary. Call on some of them to say the answers Name of subjects in the puzzle: 1. Science, 2. Music, 3 .English, 4. Vietnamese, 5. Maths 4.Consolidation - Consolidate the content of the lesson 5. Homework - Do exercises in the workbook. Learn by heart the new words and structurePrepare the next lesson. __________________________________________________________ Week 13: From 16th to 20th Nov, 2015 Preparing: 10/11/2015 Teaching :16-20/11/2015 Unit 8: What subjects do you have today? Period 52 Lesson 3 part 1+2+3 I. Aims 1. Knowledge: - Asking and answering questions about school subjects and when someone has a subject, pronounce correctly the sounds of the letter ct and cts 2. Skills: - Practice speaking, listening skills, do exercises in the book 3. Language - Sentence Partners: When do you have Science? - I have it on….. - Vocabulary: PE(physical education), Maths teacher, English teacher, II. Teaching methods: - Communicative approach. Techniques:+ Ask and answer (say individually) + Work in pairs/ groups. + Discuss. III. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. VI. Teaching processes: 1. Class organization: - Greeting - Checking for the students' attendance. 2. Oral test: - Check pupils: ask S some questions about when someone has a subject 3. New lesson Teacher’ s activities Pupils’activities Warm up Ask students to go to the board and write the words of Individually Nguyễn Thị Thanh Hương 8.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(84)</span> Tiểu học Tiên Cát 2015 - 2016 subjects Maths English Science Music Art IT, PE ... The whole class 1.Listen and repeat. Tell Ps that they are going to practice saying the letters, words, sentences in the book. Put the phonics letters ct and Work in pair cts on the board and say them a few times. Ask Ps to repeat after you. Prompt Ps to say the words and sentences, paying The whole class attention to the target phonics letters. Do chorally repetition of the words and sentences unit Ps feel confident. 2. Listen and circle. Then write and say aloud Tell Ps that they are going to listen to the tape and choose T-WC the answer then say aloud. Give Ps a few seconds Ps a few seconds to read the in the silence before guessing the answer. Ss listen to the tape and check their answer The whole class Get Ps to swap and check their answers before checking as class. Write the correct answers on the board for Ps to copy down their notebooks. Get Ps to practice saying sentences. Individually Key: 1. subjects 2. subject 3. subjects 4. subject 3. Let’s chant. Tell Ps that they are going to say the What subjects do you T-WC have today? chant. Say the chant and check comprehension. Have Ps repeat every line of the chant. When they are The whole class familiar with the rhythm, show them how to say the chant and do the actions. Divide the class into three groups to say the chant. Groups Get groups of Ps to sit face to face and practice chanting and doing the actions. Get around and offer help, if necessary. Call two groups to the front of the class to chant. The whole Groups class claps along the rhythm. 4. Consolidation - Consolidate the content of the lesson 5. Homework - Do exercises in the workbook. Learn by heart the new words and structure. Prepare the next lesson. __________________________________________________________. Nguyễn Thị Thanh Hương. 8.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(85)</span> Tiểu học Tiên Cát 2015 - 2016 rd. th. Week 14: From 23 to 27 Nov, 2015 Preparing: 15/11/2015 Teaching: 23-27/11/2015 Unit 8: What subjects do you have today? Period 53 Lesson 3 part 4+5+6 I. Aims 1. Knowledge: - Asking and answering questions about school subjects and when someone has a subject, pronounce correctly the sounds of the letter ct and cts 2. Skills: - Practice reading, writing skills, do exercises in the book 3. Language - Sentence Partners: When do you have Science? - I have it on….. - Vocabulary: favourite, favourite subject, timetable=schedule, everyday II.Teaching methods: - Communicative approach. Techniques:+ Ask and answer (say individually) + Work in pairs/ groups. + Discuss. III. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. VI. Teaching processes: 1. Class organization: - Greeting - Checking for the students' attendance. 2. Oral test: - Check pupils: ask S some questions about when someone has a subject 3. New lesson Teacher’s activities Pupils’ activities Warm up Ask ps to divide into three groups and play the Groups work game odd and end EX: school Listen 4. Read and complete. New words: Favourite: favourite subject T-WC timetable=schedule everyday Tell Ps that they are going to read the sentences and complete the timetable of Nga . Check understanding. Give The whole class Ps a few seconds to read the text in silence. Check comprehension. Give Ps time to do the task. Go around to offer help, if Group work necessary. Get Ps to swap and check their answers before checking as class. Do choral and individual repetition Key: 1. Vietnamese 2, Maths 3, Science 4, Art 5. Write about you and your subjects. Tell Ps that they are going to write themselves. Give Ps a T-WC Nguyễn Thị Thanh Hương. 8.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(86)</span> Tiểu học Tiên Cát 2015 - 2016 few seconds to look at the pictures. Elicit the words to fill in the blank to finish the writing. Call a few Ps and elicit The whole class the words to fill in the gaps. Give Ps time to do the task. Go around offer help, if Individually necessary. Get Ps to swap and check their answers before checking as class. Call a few Ps to read their sentences aloud The whole class 6. Project. Tell Ps that they are going to ask a friend in another school T-WC about his/her timetable and tick the table below. Then tell the class about it. Give each of them a small piece of paper The whole class and ask them to copy the table on it. Tell Ps to ask a friend in another school about his/her Individually timetable during break time and tick the table. Have them tell class about their friends' timetable Eg: Here is my friend's timetable. Hong is a P at Quang Trung school. She has Maths and Vietnamese on Mondays, Tuesdays, Wednesdays and Thursdays. She has English on Mondays and Wednesdays. She has Science on Tuesdays and Thursdays. She has IT and music on Wednesdays. And Art on Tuesdays. She has PE, History and Geography on Fridays. Thank you for listening. 4. Consolidation - Consolidate the content of the lesson 5. Homework - Do exercises in the workbook. Learn by heart the new words and structure Prepare the next lesson. __________________________________________________________. Nguyễn Thị Thanh Hương. 8.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(87)</span> Tiểu học Tiên Cát 2015 - 2016 rd. th. Week 14: From 23 to 27 Nov, 2015 Preparing: 15/11/2015 Teaching: 23-27/11/2015 Unit 8: What are they doing? Period 54 Lesson 1 part 1+2 I. Aims 1. Knowledge: - Asking and answering questions about what someone is doing 2. Skills: - Practice listening, speaking skills, do exercises in the book 3. Language - Sentence Partners: What is he/she doing?- He/She is….. - Vocabulary: watching a video, reading a book, writing a dictation, reading a text II. Teaching methods: - Communicative approach. Techniques: + Ask and answer (say individually) + Work in pairs/ groups. + Discuss. III. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. VI. Teaching processes: 1. Class organization: - Greeting - Checking for the students' attendance. 2. Oral test: - Check pupils: ask S some questions about when someone has a subject 3. New lesson Teacher’s activities Ps’ activities Warm up The whole class activities 1. Look, listen and repeat. Tell Ps that they are going to practice asking and answering T-WC questions about what someone doing , using What is he/she doing?- He/She is…..Draw Ps’ attention to the first picture and elicit the names of characters and what are they saying. The whole class Have Ps repeat the text a few times. Repeat the procedure with the second picture. The whole class Do choral and individual repetition, pointing to the characters speaking. Play the recording for Ps to listen and say along. Have Ps to find out the new structure. Whole class repeats it Individually for several times 2. Point and say. Vocabulary: T-WC watching a vide reading a book writing a dictation reading a text Sentence Partners: What is he/she doing?- He/She is….. Tell Ps that they are going to practice asking and answering Nguyễn Thị Thanh Hương 8.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(88)</span> Tiểu học Tiên Cát 2015 - 2016 questions What is he/she doing?- He/She is…..Point to each The whole class picture and elicit the meaning of new words. Point to the first picture and elicit the word to fill the gap. Put the question and answer on the board and have Ps repeat them a few times. The whole class Do choral and individual repetition, using the pictures in the book. Get Ps to work in pairs. Check as a class. Ask Ss to practice asking and answering about what one of Work in pairs your classmate is doing in classroom. T corrects Ss' mistake if necessary. Work in pairs 4. Consolidation - Consolidate the content of the lesson 5. Homework - Do exercises in the workbook. Learn by heart the new words and structurePrepare the next lesson. ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Week 14: From 23rd to 27th Nov, 2015 Preparing: 15/11/2015 Teaching: 23-27/11/2015 Unit 9: What are they doing? Period 55 \Lesson 1 part 3+4+5 I. Aims 1. Knowledge: - Asking and answering questions about what someone is doing 2. Skills: - Practice listening, writing skills, do exercises in the book 3. Language - Sentence Partners: What is he/she doing?- He/She is….. - Vocabulary: watching a video, reading a book, writing a dictation, reading a text II. Teaching methods: - Communicative approach. Techniques: + Ask and answer (say individually) + Work in pairs/ groups. + Discuss. III. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. VI. Teaching processes: 1. Class organization: - Greeting - Checking for the students' attendance. 2. Oral test: - Check pupils: ask S some questions about what someone is doing 3. New lesson Teacher’s activities Ps’ activities Warm up - Ask ps write some actions in English Individually 4. Listen and tick. Nguyễn Thị Thanh Hương 8.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(89)</span> Tiểu học Tiên Cát 2015 - 2016 Tell Ps that they are going to listen and tick the correct The whole class boxes. Give a few seconds for Ps to look at the pictures. Check comprehension and give feedback. Play the recording three times for Ps to listen, do the task Individually and check their answers. Get Ps to swap and check their answers before checking Work in pair as class. Key: 1.b 2.c 3.a 5. Look and write. Tell Ps that they are going to look at the pictures, name The whole class the activities, read the sentences and find out the answer for the questions. Give Ps a few seconds to read the text in Individually silence. Check comprehension and give feedback Get Ps time to do the task. Go around offer help, if Groups necessary. Get Ps to swap and check their answers before checking as a class. Write the correct answers on the board for Ps to copy down their notebooks. Call some Ps to read the text and sentences aloud Individually Key: 1 .He is reading a book 2. She is writing a dictation 3. He is listening to music 4. She is watching a video 6. Let’s play The whole class - Explain how the game Charades is played: . Divide the class into 3 groups. P1 mines a classroom activity Eg: reading a book, listening to music without making any sound or lip movements. P2 points to P1 and ask Ex: Groups What's is she/he doing? P3 answers - He/She is reading a book./….. The Ps in group take turns asking and answering the questions. Monitor the activity and offer help, if necessary 4. Consolidation - Consolidate the content of the lesson 5. Homework - Do exercises in the workbook. Learn by heart the new words and structurePrepare the next lesson. __________________________________________________________. Nguyễn Thị Thanh Hương. 8.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(90)</span> Tiểu học Tiên Cát 2015 - 2016 rd. th. Week 14: From 23 to 27 Nov, 2015 Preparing: 15/11/2015 Teaching: 23-27/11/2015 Unit 9: What are they doing? Period 56 Lesson 2 part 1+2+3 I. Aims 1. Knowledge: - Asking and answering questions about what people are doing 2. Skills: - Practice listening, writing skills, do exercises in the book 3. Language - Sentence Partners: What are they doing?- They are….. - Vocabulary: painting masks, making a puppet, making paper planes II. Teaching methods: - Communicative approach. Techniques: + Ask and answer (say individually) + Work in pairs/ groups. + Discuss. III. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. VI. Teaching processes: 1. Class organization: - Greeting - Checking for the students' attendance. 2. Oral test: - Check pupils: ask S some questions about what someone is doing 3. New lesson Teacher’s activities Ps’ activities Warm up Writing a dictation Play game: slap the board Individually Reading a comic book Reading a text. Watching a video Singing an English song. 1. Look, listen and repeat. Tell Ps that they are going to practice asking and answering questions about what people are doing, using What are they doing?- They are…..Draw Ps’ attention to the first picture and elicit the names of characters and the activities. Have Ps repeat the text a few times. Repeat the procedure with the second picture. Give feedback and check the new vocabulary. Play the recording for Ps to listen and say along. Have Ps to find out the new structure. Whole class repeat it for several times 2. Point and say. Vocabulary: painting masks making a puppet making paper planes Sentence Partners: What are they doing?- They are….. Tell Ps that they are going to practice asking and answering Nguyễn Thị Thanh Hương. 9. T-WC The whole class. The whole class Individually T_WC.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(91)</span> Tiểu học Tiên Cát 2015 - 2016 questions What are they doing?- They are…..Point to each T_ WC picture and elicit the meaning of new words. Point to the first picture and elicit the word to fill the gap. Put the question and answer on the board and have Ps repeat them a few times. Do choral and individual repetition, using the pictures in the book. Get Ps to work in pairs. Check as a class. Work in pairs 3. Let’s talk Tell Ps that they are going to practice more with their friends. The whole class Give a few seconds for Ps to read the questions and check comprehension. Call a pair to give a demonstration of the Pair work dialogue before starting the activity. Have Ps work in pairs. Go around offer help and correct the pronunciation, if necessary. Groups Call a few pairs to act out the dialogue in front of the class. Questions: Where is he/she? What is he/she doing? Where are they? What are they doing? Correct the mistake if necessary 4. Consolidation - Consolidate the content of the lesson 5. Homework - Do exercises in the workbook. Learn by heart the new words and structurePrepare the next lesson. -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Week 15: From 30th Nov to 4th Dec, 2015 Preparing: 22/11/2015 Teaching: 30/11- 4/12/2015 Unit 9: What are they doing? Period 57 Lesson 2 part 4+5+6 I. Aims 1. Knowledge: - Asking and answering questions about what people are doing 2. Skills: - Practice listening, speaking skills, do exercises in the book 3. Language - Sentence Partners: What are they doing?- They are….. - Vocabulary: painting masks, making a puppet, making paper planes II. Teaching methods: - Communicative approach. Techniques: + Ask and answer (say individually) + Work in pairs/ groups. + Discuss. III. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. VI. Teaching processes: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Hương. 9.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(92)</span> Tiểu học Tiên Cát 2015 - 2016 1. Class organization: - Greeting - Checking for the students' attendance. 2. Oral test: - Check pupils: ask S some questions about what people are doing 3. New lesson Teacher’s activities Ps’ activities Warm up Play game: Charades Whole class 4. Listen and number Tell Ps that they are going to listen and number the pictures. Give a few seconds for Ps to look at the pictures. Check comprehension and give feedback. Play the recording three times for Ps to listen, do the task and check their answers. T-WC Get Ps to swap and check their answers before checking as class. The whole class Key a.2 b.4 c31 d.1 5. Look and write. Tell Ps that they are going to look at the pictures, name the T-C activity in each picture then read the questions and answer the them. Give Ps a few seconds to read the text in silence. The whole class Check comprehension and give feedback Get Ps time to do the task. Go around offer help, if necessary. Get Ps to swap and check their answers before checking as a class. Write the correct answers on the board for Ps to copy Pair work down their notebooks. Call some Ps to read questions and answers Key: 1. They are painting masks 2. They're making kites Individually 3. They're making paper planes 4. They're making models 6. Let’s sing. Tell Ps that they are going to sing the What are they doing? Read each line and check comprehension. Sing each line and T_WC have Ps repeat it. When Ps are familiar with the tune, ask them to sing and do the actions. The whole class Ask groups of Ps to sit face to face and practice singing and doing the actions. Group work Call a group of five to sing the song and do the actions. Have the whole sing the song and do the actions. Groups 4 .Consolidation - Consolidate the content of the lesson 5. Homework - Do exercises in the workbook. Learn by heart the new words and structure. Prepare the next lesson. Nguyễn Thị Thanh Hương. 9.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(93)</span> Tiểu học Tiên Cát 2015 - 2016 th. th. Week 15: From 30 Nov to 4 Dec, 2015 Preparing: 22/11/2015 Teaching: 30/11- 4/12/2015 Unit 9: What are they doing? Period 58 Lesson 3 part 1+2+3 I. Aims 1. Knowledge: - Asking and answering questions about what people are doing and what someone is doing pronounce correctly the sounds of the letters sk and xt 2. Skills: - Practice listening, speaking skills, do exercises in the book 3. Language - Sentence Partners: What are they doing?- They are….. - Vocabulary: painting masks, making a puppet, making paper planes II. Teaching methods: - Communicative approach. Techniques: + Ask and answer (say individually) + Work in pairs/ groups. + Discuss. III. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. VI. Teaching processes: 1. Class organization: - Greeting - Checking for the students' attendance. 2. Oral test: - Check pupils: ask S some questions about what people are doing 3. New lesson Teacher’s activities Ps’ activities Warm up: Sing the song What are they doing The whole class 1 .Listen and repeat. Tell Ps that they are going to practice saying the letters, T- WC words, sentences in the book. Put the phonics letters sk and xt on the board and say them a few times. Ask Ps to repeat The whole class after you. Prompt Ps to say the words and sentences, paying attention to the target phonics letters. Do chorally repetition of the words and sentences unit Ps feel confident. 2. Listen and circle. Then write and say aloud Tell Ps that they are going to listen to the tape and choose the T- WC answer then say aloud. Give Ps a few seconds Ps a few seconds to read the in the silence before guessing the answer. The whole class Ss listen to the tape and check their answer Get Ps to swap and check their answers before checking as class. Write the correct answers on the board for Ps to copy down their notebooks. Get Ps to work in pairs and practice saying sentences. Work in pairs Key: 1.a 2. a 3. a 4.b Nguyễn Thị Thanh Hương. 9.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(94)</span> Tiểu học Tiên Cát 2015 - 2016 3. Let’s chant. Tell Ps that they are going to say the What's he doing? chant. The whole class Say the chant and check comprehension. Have Ps repeat every line of the chant. When they are familiar with the rhythm, show them how to say the chant and do the actions. Divide the class into three groups to say the chant. Groups Get groups of Ps to sit face to face and practice chanting and doing the actions. Get around and offer help, if necessary. Call two groups to the front of the class to chant. The whole Groups class claps along the rhythm. 4. Consolidation - Consolidate the content of the lesson 5. Homework - Do exercises in the workbook. Learn by heart the new words and structurePrepare the next lesson. __________________________________________________________ Week 15: From 30th Nov to 4th Dec, 2015 Preparing: 22/11/2015 Teaching :30/11- 4/12/2015 Unit 9: What are they doing? Period 59 Lesson 3 part 4+5+6 I. Aims 1. Knowledge: - Asking and answering questions about what people are doing and what someone is doing 2. Skills: - Practice reading, writing skills, do exercises in the book 3. Language - Sentence Partners: What are they doing?- They are….. - Vocabulary: painting masks, making a puppet, making paper planes II.Teaching methods: - Communicative approach. Techniques: + Ask and answer (say individually) + Work in pairs/ groups. + Discuss. III. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. VI. Teaching processes: 1. Class organization: - Greeting - Checking for the students' attendance. 2. Oral test: - Check pupils: ask S some questions about what people are doing 3. New lesson Teacher’s activities Ps’ activities Warm up Ask ps sing the chant what's he doing? The whole class Nguyễn Thị Thanh Hương 9.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(95)</span> Tiểu học Tiên Cát 2015 - 2016 4. Read and tick. Tell Ps that they are going to read the text then tick True(T) or T-WC False(F). Check understanding. Give Ps a few seconds to read the text in silence. Check comprehension. Give Ps time to do the task. Go around offer help, if necessary. Goup works Get Ps to swap and check their answers before checking as class. The whole class Do choral and individual repetition Key: 1. F 2. F 3. T 4. T 5. F 5. Write about the picture. Tell Ps that they are going to look at the picture and name the activity of each person then complete the text below. Elicit the T- WC names of each activity. Call a few Ps and elicit the words to fill in the gaps. The whole class Give Ps time to do the task. Go around offer help, if necessary. Get Ps to swap and check their answers before checking as Work in pairs class. Call a few Ps to read their sentences aloud Groups Key: drawing/ painting masks/ making a kite/ drawing houses 6. Project. Tell Ps that they are going to choose a photo of their family. Then tell the class what their family members are doing in the photo. T-WC Ask them to look at their photos and find out what each person is doing. Then they should think of the words needed to describe The whole class the picture and make notes, Eg: mum- cooking, kitchen; dadreading, living room; sister- learning English; her room. Get some Ps to do a demonstration in front of the class as an Individually example before starting activity. Eg: My mum is cooking in the kitchen. My dad is reading a book in the living room. My sister is learning English in her room. 4. Consolidation - Consolidate the content of the lesson 5. Homework - Do exercises in the workbook. Learn by heart the new words and structure. Prepare the next lesson. __________________________________________________________. Nguyễn Thị Thanh Hương. 9.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(96)</span> Tiểu học Tiên Cát 2015 - 2016 th. th. Week 15: From 30 Nov to 4 Dec, 2015 Preparing: 22/11/2015 Teaching: 30/11- 4/12/2015 Unit 10: Where are you yesterday? Period 60 Lesson 1 part 1+2 I. Aims 1. Knowledge: -Asking and answering questions about where someone was in the past 2. Skills: - Practice speaking, listening skills, do exercises in the book 3. Language - Sentence Partners: Where were you yesterday?- I was…. - Vocabulary: at home, at the zoo, on the beach, in the school library, yesterday, was/were II. Teaching methods: - Communicative approach. Techniques:+ Ask and answer (say individually) + Work in pairs/ groups. + Discuss. III. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. VI. Teaching processes: 1. Class organization: - Greeting - Checking for the students' attendance. 2. Oral test: - Check pupils: ask S some questions about what people are doing 3. New lesson Teacher’s activities Ps’ activities Warm up Ask ps sing the chant What's he doing? The whole class 1. Look, listen and repeat. Tell Ps that they are going to read the story in which Ps ask T-WC and answer questions about what someone was in the past Ask them to look at the pictures to identify the context in which language is used. Ask questions such as Who are they? Where are they? What are they talking about? Help them to The whole class identify that Miss Hien asks the Ps question and answer using Where were you yesterday?- I was….. Check comprehension. Play the recording for Ps to listen and say along. Do choral and individual repeat T- WC Have Ps to find out the new structure. Whole class repeats it for several times The whole class 2. Point and say. New words: Yesterday was/were T-WC at home at the zoo on the beach in the school library Modal sentence: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Hương. 9.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(97)</span> Tiểu học Tiên Cát 2015 - 2016 Where were you yesterday?- I was…. Put the question and answer on the board and have Ps repeat T-WC them a few times. Point to the first picture and model the task with one P, using T-WC the expressions in the bubbles and the phrases under the picture. Ask Ps to say the sentences chorally and individually. Repeat the same procedure with the rest of the pictures. T-WC Ask Ps to work in pairs, using the prompts in the bubbles and the pictures. Select some pairs to role-play the dialogue in Work in pairs front of the class. Work in pairs. Ask your partners where they were yesterday. Tell Ps that they are going to practice asking and answering question Where were you yesterday?- I was…. The whole class more with their friends. Have Ps work in pairs. Go around offer help and correct the pronunciation, if necessary. Work in pairs Call a few pairs to act out the dialogue in front of the class. 4. Consolidation - Consolidate the content of the lesson 5. Homework - Do exercises in the workbook. Learn by heart the new words and structure. Prepare the next lesson. -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Week 16: From 7th to 11th Dec, 2015 Preparing: 30/11/2015 Teaching:7- 11/12/2015 Unit 10: Where are you yesterday? Period 61 Lesson 1 part 3+4+5 I. Aims 1. Knowledge: -Asking and answering questions about where someone was in the past 2. Skills: - Practice writing, listening skills, do exercises in the book 3. Language - Sentence Partners: Where were you yesterday?- I was…. - Vocabulary: at home, at the zoo, on the beach, in the school library II. Teaching methods: - Communicative approach. Techniques:+ Ask and answer (say individually) + Work in pairs/ groups. + Discuss. III. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. VI. Teaching processes: 1. Class organization: - Greeting Nguyễn Thị Thanh Hương. 9.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(98)</span> Tiểu học Tiên Cát 2015 - 2016 - Checking for the students' attendance. 2. Oral test: - Check pupils: ask S some questions about where someone was in the past 3. New lesson Teacher’s activities Ps’ activities Warm up Play game: rub out and remember to check the new The whole class words 4. Listen and tick. T-WC Tell Ps that they are going to listen to three dialogues and tick the correct pictures. Give a few seconds for Ps to look at the pictures to identify the similarities and the differences among them. The whole class Play the recording three times for Ps to listen, do the task and check their answers. Get Ps to swap and check their answers before checking as class. T- WC Key: 1.c 2.b 3.a 5. Look and write. The whole class Tell Ps that they are going to answer the questions about where the characters were, using the pictures cues. Then ask Ps to read the questions and write the incomplete answers. T-WC Get Ps time to do the task. Go around offer help, if necessary. Get Ps to swap and check their answers before checking as a Pairs work class. Write the correct answers on the board for Ps to copy down their notebooks. Call some Ps to read the complete the questions and answers T-WC aloud Key: 1. at home/in the kitchen 2. in the library/at school T-WC 3. on the beach 6. Let’s sing. Tell Ps that they are going to sing the Where were you T-WC yesterday? song. Read each line and check comprehension. Sing each line and have Ps repeat it. When Ps are familiar with the tune, ask them The whole class to sing and do the actions. Ask groups of Ps to sit face to face and practice singing and Groups work doing the actions. Call a group of five to sing the song and do the actions. Groups work Have the whole sing the song and do the actions. 4. Consolidation - Consolidate the content of the lesson 5. Homework - Do exercises in the workbook. Learn by heart the new words and structure. Prepare the next lesson. --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Week 16: From 7th to 11th Dec, 2015 Nguyễn Thị Thanh Hương. 9.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(99)</span> Tiểu học Tiên Cát 2015 - 2016 Preparing: 30/11/2015 Teaching :7- 11/12/2015 Unit 10: Where are you yesterday? Period 62 Lesson 2 part 1+2+3 I. Aims 1. Knowledge:-Asking and answering questions about what someone did in the past 2. Skills: - Practice speaking, listening skills, do exercises in the book 3. Language - Sentence Partners: What did you do yesterday?- I watered the flowers. - Vocabulary: Played, painted, watered, watched, did II. Teaching methods: - Communicative approach. Techniques:+ Ask and answer (say individually) + Work in pairs/ groups. + Discuss. III. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. VI. Teaching processes: 1. Class organization: - Greeting - Checking for the students' attendance. 2. Oral test: - Check pupils: write the new words and modal sentence 3. New lesson Teacher’s activities Ps’ activities Warm up ask S some questions about where someone was in Pairs work the past T-WC 1. Look, listen and repeat. Tell Ps that they are going to read the story in which Ps ask The whole class and answer questions about what they did in the past. Ask Ps to look at the pictures to identify the context in which the language is used. Ask some questions such as: Who's the boy/girl? Where are they? What are they doing? Check T- WC comprehension. Play the recording, Ps listen and repeat the text a few times. The whole class Play the recording for Ps to listen and say along. Have Ps to find out the new structure. Whole class repeat it for The whole class several times 2. Point and say. Teach the phrases Vocabulary: T-WC Played painted Watered watched did Sentence Partners: What did you do yesterday? - I watered the flowers Tell Ps that they are going to practice asking and answering T-WC questions about what they did in the past. Ask Ps to look at the Nguyễn Thị Thanh Hương. 9.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(100)</span> Tiểu học Tiên Cát 2015 - 2016 four pictures to identify what the Ps did yesterday. Have Ps to look at the bubbles to understand how to ask and answer The whole class questions. Point to the first picture and model the task with one P, using the sentences in the bubbles and the phrase under the picture. Get Ps to work in pairs, using the prompts in the Pairs work bubbles and the pictures. Select some pairs to demonstrate the task in front of the class. Pairs work 3. Let’s talk Tell Ps that they are going to practice more with their friends about where their classmates were and what did they do, using T-WC Where were you yesterday? What did you do? Remind Ps how to use Verb in the past to ask and answer T-WC about what people did yesterday of speaking. Do the task with one P as a model. Put the sentences on the board and do choral and individual repetition. Ask Ps to work in pairs. Monitor the activity and offer help if Pairs work necessary. Select some pairs to role play in front of the class. Pairs work 4. Consolidation - Consolidate the content of the lesson 5. Homework - Do exercises in the workbook. Learn by heart the new words and structure. Prepare the next lesson. -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Week 16: From 7th to 11th Dec, 2015 Preparing: 30/11/2015 Teaching :7- 11/12/2015 Unit 10: Where are you yesterday? Period 63 Lesson 2 part 4+5+6 I. Aims 1. Knowledge: -Asking and answering questions about what someone did in the past. 2. Skills: - Practice speaking, listening skills, do exercises in the book 3. Language - Sentence Partners: What did you do yesterday?- I watered the flowers. - Vocabulary: Played, painted, watered, watched, did II. Teaching methods: - Communicative approach. Techniques: + Ask and answer (say individually) + Work in pairs/ groups. + Discuss. III. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. VI. Teaching processes: 1. Class organization: - Greeting - Checking for the students' attendance. Nguyễn Thị Thanh Hương. 1.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(101)</span> Tiểu học Tiên Cát 2015 - 2016 2. Oral test: - Check pupils: write the new words and modal sentence 3. New lesson Teacher’s activities Ps’ activities Warm up ask S some questions about what someone did in Pairs work the past T-WC 4. Listen and number Tell Ps that they are going to listen to a text about where Linda The whole class was and what she did and number the pictures. Check understanding Play the recording for Ps to listen and number the pictures. T- WC Play the recording again for Ps to check their answer. Get Ps to swap and check their answers before checking as The whole class class. Key a.3 b.1 c.2 5. Look and write. Tell Ps that they are going to answer the questions about where The whole class he/she was and what she/he did, using the cues. Ask them to look at the four pictures then read the questions and write the answers. Get Ps time to do the task independently. Go around Groups work to offer help, if necessary. Get Ps to swap and check their answers before checking as a class. Call some Ps to read questions and answers Key: 1. in the garden/watered the flowers 2. In the bedroom/ watched TV T-WC 3. on the beach/ played football 6. Let’s play - Tell Ps that they are going to play game: Pelmanism. Ask them to play in small groups. Prepare two sets of cards for T-WC each group, one with activities in the present tense, and the other with the same activities in the past tense. First, one The whole class player in each group shuffles the cards and lays them face down on the table. Each player in turn selects two cards and turns them over. If the cards show the same activity in the Groups work present and past tenses, that player wins the pair and goes on to turn over another pair of cards. If the cards show different activities, the players should turn them face down again and the next player has a turn. The game ends when all the cards are gone. The winner is the player with the most pairs. Call on one group to act out the game in front of the class 4. Consolidation - Consolidate the content of the lesson 5. Homework - Do exercises in the workbook. Learn by heart the new words and structure. Prepare the next lesson. ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Nguyễn Thị Thanh Hương. 1.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(102)</span> Tiểu học Tiên Cát 2015 - 2016 Week 16: From 7th to 11th Dec, 2015 Preparing: 30/11/2015 Teaching :7- 11/12/2015 Unit 10 : Where are you yesterday? Period 64 Lesson 3 part 1+2+3 I. Aims 1. Knowledge:-Asking and answering questions about what someone did and where someone was in the past, practise saying the sounds of the letters ed in the words and in the sentences 2. Skills: - Practice speaking, listening skills, do exercises in the book 3. Language - Sentence Partners: What did you do yesterday?- I watered the flowers. - Vocabulary: Played, painted, watered, watched, did II. Teaching methods: - Communicative approach. Techniques:+ Ask and answer (say individually) + Work in pairs/ groups. + Discuss. III. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. VI. Teaching processes: 1. Class organization: - Greeting - Checking for the students' attendance. 2. Oral test: - Check pupils: write the new words and modal sentence 3. New lesson Teacher’s activities Ps’ activities Warm up ask S some questions about where someone was Pairs work and what someone did in the past T-WC 1.Listen and repeat. Tell Ps that they are going to practice saying the letters, words, The whole class sentences in the book. Put the phonics letters ed on the board and say them a few times. Play the recording and ask Ps to repeat a few times. Prompt Ps to say the words and sentences, T- WC paying attention to the target phonics letters. Do chorally repetition of the words and sentences unit Ps feel confident. The whole class Get some Ps to say the sentences in front of the class. 2. Listen and tick. Then say aloud Tell Ps that they are going to listen to the tape and choose the answer then say aloud. Give them a few seconds to read the The whole class sentences in silence and guess how the verbs played, watched, painted are pronounce. Play the recording so they can listen and tick the correct boxes. Play the recording again for Ps to The whole class check their answer Get Ps to swap and check their answers before checking as Nguyễn Thị Thanh Hương. 1.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(103)</span> Tiểu học Tiên Cát 2015 - 2016 class. Ask Ps to read the sentences aloud Key: 1. /d/ 2. /t/ 3. /id/ 3. Let’s chant. Tell Ps that they are going to say the What did he do yesterday? chant. Say the chant and check comprehension. Have Ps repeat every line of the chant. When they are familiar with the rhythm, show them how to say the chant and do the actions. Divide the class into three groups to say the chant. Get groups of Ps to sit face to face and practice chanting and doing the actions. Get around and offer help, if necessary. Call two groups to the front of the class to chant and do the actions. The rest class claps along the rhythm.. T-WC The whole class Groups work. 4. Consolidation - Consolidate the content of the lesson 5. Homework - Do exercises in the workbook. Learn by heart the new words and structure. Prepare the next lesson. ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Week 17: From 14th to 18th Dec, 2015 Preparing: 5/12/2015 Teaching: 14- 18/12/2015 Unit 10: Where are you yesterday? Period 65 Lesson 3 part 4+5+6 I. Aims 1. Knowledge:-Asking and answering questions about what someone did in the past 2. Skills: - Practice writing, listening skills, do exercises in the book 3. Language - Sentence Partners: What did you do yesterday?- I watered the flowers. - Vocabulary: Played, painted, watered, watched, did II. Teaching methods: - Communicative approach. Techniques:+ Ask and answer (say individually) + Work in pairs/ groups. + Discuss. III. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. VI. Teaching processes: 1. Class organization: - Greeting - Checking for the students' attendance. 2. Oral test: - Check pupils: write the new words and modal sentence 3. New lesson Nguyễn Thị Thanh Hương. 1.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(104)</span> Tiểu học Tiên Cát 2015 - 2016 Teacher’s activities Ps’ activities Warm up ask Ps to read the chant What did he do yesterday? The whole class 4. Read and complete. Tell Ps that they are going to read the text and complete the The whole class sentences. Have them to read the incomplete sentences under the text and elicit what the words they need to fill in the gaps. Ask Ps to read the text to find the information to complete the Groups work sentences. Give Ps time to do the task. Go around offer help, if necessary. Get Ps to swap and check their answers before checking as class. Key: 1. watered the flowers in the garden 2. played chess with her father 3. watched TV 5. Write about you. Tell Ps that they are going to write a short paragraph about T_WC themselves. Have Ps to discuss what they did yesterday. Forcus Ps on what they did in the morning, afternoon and The whole class evening. Check comprehension. Give Ps time to do the task. Go around offer help, if necessary. Individually Get Ps to swap and check their answers before checking as class. Call a few Ps to read their sentences aloud 6. Project. Tell Ps that they are going to interview three friends about what they did last week and where they were then report to the T-WC class. Give each them a piece of paper. Have Ps work in pairs and take turns asking and answering. They should take notes Pairs work during the interview When Ps finish interviewing, ask them to report to the class about their partners' weekend. Ex: Hello, everyone. I interviewed Thu. Last weekend, Thu was on the beach. She played badminton with her friends. They went swimming in the sea. Then they had dinner in a restaurant. They were very happy. 4. Consolidation - Consolidate the content of the lesson 5. Homework - Do exercises in the workbook. Learn by heart the new words and structure. Prepare the next lesson: Review vocabulary, modal sentences from unit 6 to unit 10 ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------. Nguyễn Thị Thanh Hương. 1.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(105)</span> Tiểu học Tiên Cát 2015 - 2016 Week 17: From 14th to 18th Dec, 2015 Preparing: 5/12/2015 Teaching :14- 18/12/2015 Period 66 REVIEW 2 I. Aims 1. KnowledgeIn the end of the lesson, ps will be able to help students to review what they have learnt and review vocabulary, grammar..., 2. Skills: - Practice writing, listening, reading, speaking skills by doing exercises 3. Language - Sentence Partners: from unit 5 to unit 10. - Vocabulary: from unit 5 to unit 10 II. Teaching methods: - Communicative approach. Techniques:+ Ask and answer (say individually) + Work in pairs/ groups. + Discuss. III. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. VI. Teaching processes: 1. Class organization: - Greeting - Checking for the students' attendance. 2. Oral test: - Check pupils: write the new words and modal sentence 3. New lesson Teacher’s activities Ps’ activities Warm up sing a song The whole class 1. Listen and tick. Tell Ps that they are going to listen to four dialogues and tick the correct pictures. Give a few seconds for Ps to look at the T- WC pictures to identify the similarities and the differences among them. Check comprehension and elicit the information about The whole class the pictures and give feedback Play the recording three times for Ps to listen, do the task and The whole class check their answers. Get Ps to swap and check their answers before checking as class. Key: 1.c 2.b 3.a 4. b 4. Read and circle. Tell Ps that they are going to read the text and circle the T_WC correct answers. Give Ps a few seconds to read the text in silence. Check comprehension and give feedback. Give Ps time to do the task. Go around offer help, if necessary. Goups work Get Ps to swap and check their answers before checking as class. Key: 1. a 2. b 3. a 4. c Nguyễn Thị Thanh Hương. 1.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(106)</span> Tiểu học Tiên Cát 2015 - 2016 3. Read and match. Tell Ps that they are going to read the sentences on the left and pair them with those on the right by drawing a line between them. Check understanding. Give Ps a few seconds to read the text in silence. Check comprehension. Give Ps time to do the task. Go around offer help, if necessary. Get Ps to swap and check their answers before checking as class. Do choral and individual repetition Key: 1. d 2. e 3. a 4. b 5. c 4. Look and write. Tell Ps that they are going to look at the pictures and questions and write the answers. Give Ps a few seconds to read the text in silence. Check comprehension and give feedback Get Ps time to do the task. Go around to offer help, if necessary. Get Ps to swap and check their answers before checking as a class. Call some Ps to read questions and answers Key: 1. It's in Binh Minh village 2. I/We have English, science, Vietnamese and Maths. 3. He's playing basketball/ She's listening to music. 4. They were on the beach/ They played football. 5. Let's write Tell Ps that they are going to read the in complete text and fill in the gaps. Ask them to look at the pictures and read the text in silence. Check comprehension and elicit the words to fill the gaps. Get Ps time to do the task. Go around offer help, if necessary. Get Ps to swap and check their answers before checking as a class. Write the correct answers on the board for Ps to copy down their notebooks. Call some Ps to read the complete text aloud Key: 1. listening to music 2. playing chess 3. skipping rope 4. reading a book.. The whole class. Pairs work T-WC. T-WC Pairs work The whole class. T-WC Groups work The whole class. 4. Consolidation - Consolidate the content of the lesson 5. Homework - Do exercises in the workbook. Learn by heart the new words and structure. Prepare the next lesson: Review vocabulary, modal sentences from unit 6 to unit 10 ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------. Nguyễn Thị Thanh Hương. 1.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(107)</span> Tiểu học Tiên Cát 2015 - 2016 Week 17: From 14th to 18th Dec, 2015 Preparing: 5/12/2015 Teaching :14- 18/12/2015. Period 67: Short story: cat and mouse 2 I. Aims 1. KnowledgeIn the end of the lesson, ps will be able to help students to review what they have learnt and review vocabulary, grammar..., 2. Skills: - Practice writing, listening, reading, speaking skills by doing exercises 3. Language - Sentence Partners: from unit 5 to unit 10. - Vocabulary: from unit 5 to unit 10 II. Teaching methods: - Communicative approach. Techniques:+ Ask and answer (say individually) + Work in pairs/ groups. + Discuss. III. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. VI. Teaching processes: 1. Class organization: - Greeting - Checking for the students' attendance. 2. Oral test: - Check pupils: write the new words and modal sentence 3. New lesson Teacher’s activities Ps’ activities Warm up Play a game : Kim's game The whole class 1. Read and listen to the story Tell Ps that they are going to read and listen to the story. T- WC After they have read the story, ask them some questions: Who is Mary? What can she do? What game are the cats playing at The whole class Maurice's birthday party? Play the recording two times for Ps to read and listen to the story. 2. Complete the conversation. Tell Ps that they are going to read the conversation and fill the T_WC gaps. Give Ps a few seconds to read in silence. Check comprehension and elicit the words to fill the gaps. Give Ps time to do the task. Go around, offer help, if Pairs work necessary. Get Ps to swap and check their answers before checking as class. Do choral and individual repetition Key: 1. day 2. Monday 3. date 4. fifth 5. birthday 6. Having a party 3. Work in pairs. Ask and answer the questions. The whole class Tell Ps that they are going to read and answer the questions. Give Ps a few seconds to read the story again in silence then Nguyễn Thị Thanh Hương 1.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(108)</span> Tiểu học Tiên Cát 2015 - 2016 read the questions and answer them in pair. Check comprehension and give feedback Get Ps time to do the task. Go around offer help, if necessary. Get Ps to swap and check their answers before checking as a class. Call some Ps to read questions and answers Key: 1 It's Maurice's birthday party. 2. It's red 3. They're playing Blind man's bluff 4. Four cats are playing the game. 5. He's five 4. Write the correct answers to activity 3 Tell Ps that the five statements are the answers to the questions in activity 3 but they are wrong, and that they should correct them. Give Ps a few seconds to read the first correct answer as an example, then read the statements and ask Ps to correct them in silence Get Ps time to do the task. Go around offer help, if necessary. Get Ps to swap and check their answers before checking as a class. Write the correct answers on the board for Ps to copy down their notebooks. Call some Ps to read the statements aloud Key: 2. No, it isn't. It's red. 5. No, he isn't. He's five. 3. No, they aren't. They are playing Blind man's bluff 4. No, four cats are playing the game. Pairs work T-WC. T-WC The whole class Group work The whole class. 4. Consolidation - Consolidate the content of the lesson 5. Homework - Do exercises in the workbook. Learn by heart the new words and structure. Prepare the next lesson: Review vocabulary, modal sentences from unit 6 to unit 10 ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------. Nguyễn Thị Thanh Hương. 1.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(109)</span> Tiểu học Tiên Cát 2015 - 2016 Week 17: From 14th to 18th Dec, 2015 Preparing: 5/12/2015 Teaching :14- 18/12/2015 Period 68: REVIEW I. Aims 1. KnowledgeIn the end of the lesson, ps will be able to help students to review what they have learnt and review vocabulary, grammar..., 2. Skills: - Practice writing, listening, reading, speaking skills by doing exercises 3. Language - Sentence Partners: from unit 5 to unit 10. - Vocabulary: from unit 5 to unit 10 II. Teaching methods: - Communicative approach. Techniques:+ Ask and answer (say individually) + Work in pairs/ groups. + Discuss. III. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. VI. Teaching processes: 1. Class organization: - Greeting - Checking for the students' attendance. 2. Oral test: - Check pupils: notebook, textbook and workbook 3. New lesson Teacher’s activities Ps’ activities Warm up: - Answer T's questions Individuals Ex1. Order the words 1. hobby/what/your/is? ……………………………………………… Individual work 2. hobby/a/my/kite/flying/is ………………………………………………. 3. like/what/you/doing/do? ……………………………………. 4. Photos/I/taking/like ……………………………………. 5. subjects/what/have/you/do/today? …………………………………………….. 6. Vietnamese/I/and/music/art/have ………………………………………………………. Exercise 2: Circle the odd one out 1. A. class B. school C. grade D. date 2. A. Maths B. English C. Music D. subject Pairs work 3. A. day B. Monday C. Wednesday D. Sunday 4. A. October B. January C. month D. May 5 A. sing B. painted C. played D. watched Nguyễn Thị Thanh Hương. 1.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(110)</span> Tiểu học Tiên Cát 2015 - 2016 Ex3 Translate into English 1. Hôm qua mẹ của tôi đã tưới hoa. ……………………………………………………….. Individual 2. Tom ở trong thư viện trường hôm qua. ………………………………………………………. 3. Linda đang làm gì?- Bạn ấy đang đọc bài. ………………………………………………………. 4. Bạn học môn tiếng anh khi nào? ……………………………………………………… 5. Tớ học môn Khoa học vào thứ 2. ……………………………………………………… 6. Sở thích của bạn là gì? ……………………………………………………. 7. Tớ thích sưu tầm tem. ……………………………………………………. 4. Consolidation - Consolidate the content of the lesson 5. Homework - Do exercises in the workbook. Learn by heart the new words and structure. Prepare the next lesson: Review vocabulary, modal sentences from unit 6 to unit 10 -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Week 18: From 21st to 25th Dec, 2015 Preparing: 12/12/2015 Teaching: 21- 25/12/2015 Period 69: REVIEW I. Aims 1. Knowledge At the end of the lesson, ps will be able to help students to review what they have learnt and review vocabulary, grammar..., 2. Skills: - Practice writing, listening, reading, speaking skills by doing exercises 3. Language - Sentence Partners: from unit 5 to unit 10. - Vocabulary: from unit 5 to unit 10 II. Teaching methods: - Communicative approach. Techniques: + Ask and answer (say individually) + Work in pairs/ groups. + Discuss. III. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. VI. Teaching processes: 1. Class organization: - Greeting - Checking for the students' attendance. 2. Oral test: - Check pupils: notebook, textbook and workbook 3. New lesson Nguyễn Thị Thanh Hương. 1.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(111)</span> Tiểu học Tiên Cát 2015 - 2016 Ps’ activities Individuals. Teacher’s activities Warm up: -Answer T's questions Ex1. Read and complete Group work Friend Chess Players Game hobby Peter has got some (1) friends. They have the same (2)_________. That is playing chess. Peter and his friends are good chess (3)_______ at their school. He and his friends often play chess after school. Sometimes Nam wins the (4)______. Quan is better than Nam. And Phong is the best. Peter is not good at playing (5)___________as his friends are. But he has got a very beautiful chess board. (6) Tick the best name for the story A. Game of chess B. Playing Chess C. Chess playing Ex2. Order the words Individual work 1. school/is/where/your? ………………………………………………….. Nguyen Trai/on/is/street/it ………………………………………………….. 2. class/in/what/is/Nam? ………………………………………………….. class/he/in/4A/is. ……………………………………………………………. 3. name/school/what/of/your/is/the? ………………………………………………………… 4. like/reading/like/music/listening/I/don't/to/I/but. ……………………………………………………… 4. Consolidation - Consolidate the content of the lesson 5. Homework - Do exercises in the workbook. Learn by heart the new words and structure. Prepare the next lesson: Review vocabulary, modal sentences from unit 6 to unit 10 ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------. Nguyễn Thị Thanh Hương. 1.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(112)</span> Tiểu học Tiên Cát 2015 - 2016 Week 18: From 21st to 25th Dec, 2015 Preparing: 12/12/2015 Teaching :21- 25/12/2015 Period 70: REVIEW I. Aims 1. Knowledge - At the end of the lesson, ps will be able to help students to review what they have learnt and review vocabulary, grammar..., 2. Skills: - Practice writing, listening, reading, speaking skills by doing exercises 3. Language - Sentence Partners: from unit 5 to unit 10. - Vocabulary: from unit 5 to unit 10 II. Teaching methods: - Communicative approach. Techniques:+ Ask and answer (say individually) + Work in pairs/ groups. + Discuss. III. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. VI. Teaching processes: 1. Class organization: - Greeting - Checking for the students' attendance. 2. Oral test: - Check pupils: notebook, textbook and workbook 3. New lesson Teacher’s activities Ps’ activities Warm up: -Answer T's questions Individual work I. Order the sentences 1. did/what/he/yesterday/do?. Individual work. painted/he/a picture/ 2. what/your hobby/is? hobby/my/flying a kite/is 3. like/what/you/doing/do? /I/taking photos/like 4. what subjects/have/you/do/today? Vietnamese/I/and Art/Music/have/ 5. you/have/P.E/when/do? have/Monday/on/I/and Friday/it 6. they/what/doing/now/are?/ they/writing/ a dictation/are. Nguyễn Thị Thanh Hương. 1.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(113)</span> Tiểu học Tiên Cát 2015 - 2016 7. were/yesterday/you/where?/ the school library/I/in/was. IV. Answer the questions about yourself and your family members 1. What did your father do yesterday?. Pairs work. 2. Where was your mother yesterday? 3. What are you doing now? 4. What subject do you like? 5. When do you have Music? 6. What does your sister like doing? 7. Where’s your school? 8. What class are you in? 4. Consolidation - Consolidate the content of the lesson 5. Homework - Do exercises in the workbook. Learn by heart the new words and structure. Prepare the next lesson: Review vocabulary, modal sentences from unit 6 to unit 10 -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Week 18: From 21st to 25th Dec, 2015 Period 71 + 72: Test for the first term ( Đề và đáp án của phòng giáo dục và đào tạo Việt Trì). Nguyễn Thị Thanh Hương. 1.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(114)</span> Tiểu học Tiên Cát 2015 - 2016 th. th. Week 19: From 4 to 8 Jan, 2016 Preparing: 24/12/2015 Teaching: 4-8/1/2016 Unit 11: What time is it? Period 73 Lesson 1 part 1+2 I. Aims 1. Knowledge:- Ps will be able to ask and answer questions about time 2. Skills: - Practice speaking, listening skills, do exercises in the book 3. Language - Sentence Partners: What time is it?- It's…(+ time) - Vocabulary: time, o'clock, it's time for…, it's time to get up, have to go home, a.m, p.m II.Teaching methods: - Communicative approach. Techniques: + Ask and answer (say individually) + Work in pairs/ groups. + Discuss. III. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. VI. Teaching processes: 1. Class organization: - Greeting - Checking for the students' attendance. 2. Oral test: - Check pupils: ask S some questions about their personal information 3. New lesson Teacher’s activities Ps’ activities Warm up Ask Ps sing the chant What's he doing? The whole class 1. Look, listen and repeat. Tell Ps that they are going to ask and answer questions about T-WC time. Ask them to look at the pictures to identify the context in which language is used. Ask questions such as Who are they? Where are they? What are they talking about? Help them to identify that Miss Hien asks the Ps question and answer using The whole class What time is it?- It's…(+ time)Check comprehension. Play the recording for Ps to listen and say along. Do choral and T- WC individual repeat Have Ps to find out the new structure. Whole class repeats it The whole class for several times 2. Point and say. New words: T-WC Time o'clock it's time for it's time to get up have to go home a.m p.m Modal sentence: What time is it?- It's…(+ time) T-WC Put the question and answer on the board and have Ps repeat Nguyễn Thị Thanh Hương. 1.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(115)</span> Tiểu học Tiên Cát 2015 - 2016 them a few times. T-WC Point to the first picture and model the task with one P, using the expressions in the bubbles and the phrases under the picture. Ask Ps to say the sentences chorally and individually. T-WC Repeat the same procedure with the rest of the pictures. Ask Ps to work in pairs, using the prompts in the bubbles and Work in pairs the pictures. Select some pairs to role-play the dialogue in front of the class. Work in pairs. Ask your partners what time it is Tell Ps that they are going to practice asking and answering about time with their friends. The whole class Have Ps work in pairs. Go around, offer help and correct the pronunciation, if necessary. Call a few pairs to act out the dialogue in front of the class. Work in pairs 4 .Consolidation - Consolidate the content of the lesson 5. Home link - Do exercises in the workbook. Learn by heart the new words and structure. Prepare the next lesson. -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Week 19: From 4th to 8th Jan, 2016 Preparing: 28/12/2015 Teaching: 4-8/1/2016 Unit 11: What time is it? Period 74 Lesson 1 part 3+4+5 I. Aims 1. Knowledge:- Ps will be able to ask and answer questions about time 2. Skills: - Practice writing, listening skills, do exercises in the book 3. Language - Sentence Partners: What time is it? - It's…(+ time) - Vocabulary: time, o'clock, it's time for…, it's time to get up, have to go home, a.m, p.m II.Teaching methods: - Communicative approach. Techniques: + Ask and answer (say individually) + Work in pairs/ groups. + Discuss. III. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. VI. Teaching processes: 1. Class organization: - Greeting - Checking for the students' attendance. 2. Oral test: - Check pupils: ask S to write new words and structure Nguyễn Thị Thanh Hương. 1.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(116)</span> Tiểu học Tiên Cát 2015 - 2016 3. New lesson Teacher’s activities Warm up Ask and answer about time 3. Listen and tick. Tell Ps that they are going to listen to three dialogues and tick the correct pictures. Give a few seconds for Ps to look at the pictures to identify the time Play the recording three times for Ps to listen, do the task and check their answers. Get Ps to swap and check their answers before checking as class. Key: 1.b 2.b 3.a 4. Look and write. Tell Ps that they are going to answer to the question What time is it?, using the pictures cues. Then ask Ps to read the questions and write the answers. Get Ps time to do the task. Go around, offer help, if necessary. Get Ps to swap and check their answers before checking as a class. Write the correct answers on the board for Ps to copy down their notebooks. Call some Ps to read the questions and answers aloud Key: 2. It's ten twenty 2. It's ten thirty 3. It's eleven fifty 5. Let’s sing. Tell Ps that they are going to sing the What time is it? song. Read each line and check comprehension. Sing each line and have Ps repeat it. When Ps are familiar with the tune, ask them to sing and do the actions. Ask groups of Ps to sit face to face and practice singing and doing the actions. Call a group of five to sing the song and do the actions. Have the whole sing the song and do the actions.. Ps’ activities Pair work T-WC The whole class T- WC. The whole class T-WC Pairs work T-WC. T-WC. Groups work Groups work. 4. Consolidation - Consolidate the content of the lesson 5. Home link - Do exercises in the workbook. Prepare the next lesson. ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------. Nguyễn Thị Thanh Hương. 1.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(117)</span> Tiểu học Tiên Cát 2015 - 2016 th. th. Week 19: From 4 to 8 Jan, 2016 Preparing: 28/12/2015 Teaching: 4-8/1/2016 Unit 11: What time is it? Period 75 Lesson 2 part 1+2+3 I. Aims 1. Knowledge: -Ps will be able to ask and answer questions about daily routines 2. Skills: - Practice speaking, listening skills, do exercises in the book 3. Language - Sentence Partners: What time do you get up?- I get up at….(+time) - Vocabulary: get up, have breakfast, have lunch, have dinner, go to bed, go home II. Teaching methods: - Communicative approach. Techniques:+ Ask and answer (say individually) + Work in pairs/ groups. + Discuss. III. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. VI. Teaching processes: 1. Class organization: - Greeting - Checking for the students' attendance. 2. Oral test: - Check pupils: write the new words and modal sentence 3. New lesson Teacher’s activities Ps’ activities Warm up: Sing What time is it? song Whole class 1. Look, listen and repeat. Tell Ps that they are going to ask and answer questions about daily routines. Ask Ps to look at the pictures to identify the Pairs work context in which the language is used. Ask some questions T-WC such as: Who's the boy/girl? Where are they? What are they doing? Check comprehension. The whole class Play the recording, Ps listen and repeat the text a few times. Play the recording for Ps to listen and say along. Have Ps to find out the new structure. Whole class repeat it for several times T- WC 2. Point and say. Vocabulary: The whole class get up have breakfast have lunch have dinner The whole class go to bed go home Sentence Partners: What time do you get up? - I get up at….(+time) Tell Ps that they are going to practice asking and answering T-WC questions about the time for daily activities. Ask Ps to look at Nguyễn Thị Thanh Hương. 1.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(118)</span> Tiểu học Tiên Cát 2015 - 2016 the four pictures to teach the phases. Have Ps to look at the bubbles to understand how to ask and answer questions. Point to the first picture and model the task with one P, using the T-WC sentences in the bubbles and the phrase under the picture. Get Ps to work in pairs, using the prompts in the bubbles and the Pairs work pictures. Select some pairs to demonstrate the task in front of the class. Pairs work 3. Let’s talk Tell Ps that they are going to revise what they have learn in The whole class Lesson 1 and Lesson 2. Have Pa work in pairs: ask and answer the questions What time is it? What time do you…? And the other gives the answers. Then they swap roles. Pairs work Call on a few pairs to act out the dialogue in front of the whole class. Correct the pronunciation if necessary. Pairs work 4. Consolidation - Consolidate the content of the lesson 5. Homework - Do exercises in the workbook. Learn by heart the new words and structure. Prepare the next lesson. -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Week 19: From 4th to 8th Jan, 2016 Preparing: 28/12/2015 Teaching: 4-8/1/2016 Unit 11: What time is it? Period 76 Lesson 2 part 4+5+6 I. Aims 1. Knowledge: - Ps will be able to ask and answer questions about daily routines 2. Skills: - Practice speaking, listening skills, do exercises in the book 3. Language - Sentence Partners: What time do you get up?- I get up at….(+time) - Vocabulary: get up, have breakfast, have lunch, have dinner, go to bed, go home II.Teaching methods: - Communicative approach. Techniques: + Ask and answer (say individually) + Work in pairs/ groups. + Discuss. III. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks VI. Teaching processes: 1. Class organization: - Greeting - Checking for the students' attendance. 2. Oral test: - Check pupils: write the new words and modal sentence 3. New lesson Nguyễn Thị Thanh Hương. 1.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(119)</span> Tiểu học Tiên Cát 2015 - 2016 Teacher’s activities Ps’ activities Warm up ask S some questions about daily routines Individual 4. Listen and draw the time Tell Ps that they are going to listen to a text about Tom's daily routine and draw the hands of the clocks. T-WC Focus their attention on the pictures and discuss with them what Tom does every day. Then tell them to look at the clock The whole class in each picture and explain that they have to draw tha hands to show the time. Check understanding Play the recording for Ps to draw the time. Play the recording T- WC again for Ps to check their answer. Get Ps to swap and check their answers before checking as The whole class class. Key b.7.30 c.8.15 d.8.00 e. 9.00 5. Draw and write the time. Tell Ps that they are going to draw the time and write about their daily routine. The whole class First, ask them to look at the questions and identify what daily routines they are going to write about. Then have them draw the hands of the clocks to show the times they usually do these Groups work activities. Finally, get them to write the answers to the questions, using the clocks they have just drawn. Check understanding Set a time limit for Ps to do the task independently. Go around and offer help, if necessary Get them to swap their answers before checking as a class. Call some Ps to read questions and answers 6. Let’s play - Tell Ps that they are going to play game: Pass the secret. T-WC Divide the class into groups of six or seven. Ask them to sit in circles. P1 in each circle whispers a sentence to P2 Ex: I get up at six o'clock. Ten P2 whispers the same sentence to P3. Continue until the last P has heard the sentence and said it aloud. The group that says the sentence correctly in the Groups work shortest time will win the game. Call on one group to act out the game in front of the class. 4. Consolidation - Consolidate the content of the lesson 5. Home link - Do exercises in the workbook. Learn by heart the new words and structure. Prepare the next lesson. ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------. Nguyễn Thị Thanh Hương. 1.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(120)</span> Tiểu học Tiên Cát 2015 - 2016 Week 20: From 11th to 15th Jan, 2016 Preparing: 08/1/2016 Teaching: 11-15/1/2016 Unit 11: What time is it? Period 77 Lesson 3 part 1+2+3 I. Aims 1. Knowledge:- Ps will be able to ask and answer questions about daily routines and time, practise saying the sounds of the letters oo in the words and in the sentences 2. Skills: - Practice speaking, listening skills, do exercises in the book 3. Language - Sentence Partners: - Vocabulary: usually, it’s time for dinner, start, finish, do one’s homework II. Teaching methods: - Communicative approach. Techniques:+ Ask and answer (say individually) + Work in pairs/ groups. + Discuss. III. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. VI. Teaching processes: 1. Class organization: - Greeting - Checking for the students' attendance. 2. Oral test: - Check pupils: write the new words and modal sentence 3. New lesson Teacher’s activities Ps’ activities Warm up Sing What time is it? song Pairs work 1.Listen and repeat. T-WC Tell Ps that they are going to practice saying the letters, words, sentences in the book. Put the phonics letters oo on the board The whole class and say them a few times. Play the recording and ask Ps to repeat a few times. Prompt Ps to say the words and sentences, paying attention to the target phonics letters. Do chorally T- WC repetition of the words and sentences unit Ps feel confident. Get some Ps to say the sentences in front of the class. The whole class 2. Listen and tick. Then say aloud Tell Ps that they are going to listen to the tape and writ the words n the blanks then say aloud. Give them a few seconds to read the sentences in silence and guess the words to fill in the The whole class blank. Play the recording so they can write the appropriate words to fill in the blank. Play the recording again for Ps to check their answer The whole class Get Ps to swap and check their answers before checking as class. Nguyễn Thị Thanh Hương. 1.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(121)</span> Tiểu học Tiên Cát 2015 - 2016 Ask Ps to say the sentences aloud Key: 1. book 2. school 3. cook 4. noon 3. Let’s chant. Tell Ps that they are going to say the What did he do yesterday? chant. Say the chant and check comprehension. Have Ps repeat every line of the chant. When they are familiar with the rhythm, show them how to say the chant and do the actions. Divide the class into three groups to say the chant. Get groups of Ps to sit face to face and practice chanting and doing the actions. Get around and offer help, if necessary. Call two groups to the front of the class to chant and do the actions. The rest class claps along the rhythm.. T-WC The whole class Groups work. 4. Consolidation - Consolidate the content of the lesson 5. Homework - Do exercises in the workbook. Learn by heart the new words and structure. Prepare the next lesson. ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Week 20: From 11th to 15th Jan, 2016 Preparing: 08/1/2016 Teaching: 11-15/1/2016 Unit 11: What time is it? Period 78 Lesson 3 part 4+5+6 I. Aims 1. Knowledge: - Ps will be able to ask and answer questions about daily routines and time, practise saying the sounds of the letters oo in the words and in the sentences 2. Skills: - Practice speaking, reading, writing skills, do exercises in the book 3. Language - Sentence Partners: - Vocabulary: usually, it’s time for dinner, start, finish, do one’s homework II. Teaching methods: - Communicative approach. Techniques:+ Ask and answer (say individually) + Work in pairs/ groups. + Discuss. III. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. VI. Teaching processes: 1. Class organization: - Greeting - Checking for the students' attendance. 2. Oral test: - Check pupils: write the new words and modal sentence 3. New lesson Nguyễn Thị Thanh Hương. 1.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(122)</span> Tiểu học Tiên Cát 2015 - 2016 3. New lesson Teacher’s activities Ps’ activities Warm up ask Ps to read the chant What time do you go to The whole class school? 4. Read and complete. The whole class Tell Ps that they are going to read the text and complete the sentences. Have them to read the incomplete sentences under the text and elicit what the words they need to fill in the gaps. Groups work Ask Ps to read the text to find the information to complete the sentences. Give Ps time to do the task. Go around, offer help, if necessary. Get Ps to swap and check their answers before checking as class. Key: 1. 7 a.m/ 7.00 2. 5.00/ five o’clock 3. has dinner 4. go to bed 5. Let’s write Tell Ps that they are going to write a short paragraph about Linda’s daily routine, using the picture cues. Have Ps to T_ WC discuss what activities what Linda does these activities by looking at the clock. Remind them to write the verbs in the The whole class third person singular. Check comprehension. Give Ps time to do the task. Go around offer help, if necessary. Groups work Get Ps to swap and check their answers before checking as class. Call a few Ps to write the paragraph on the board Key: She has breakfast at six forty five. She goes to school at T-WC seven. She watches TV at eight thirty. And she goes to bed at nine fifteen. 6. Project. Tell Ps that they are going to do a project about their daily routine. Give each P a card. Have Ps copy the table from the Individually book on to their cards. Give Ps time to write the information about themselves. Get Ps to swap their cards in pairs. They should look at their partners’ cards and describe their daily routines. Call some Ps to tell the class about their partners. 4. Consolidation - Consolidate the content of the lesson 5. Homework - Do exercises in the workbook. Learn by heart the new words and modal sentence. Prepare the next lesson ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------. Nguyễn Thị Thanh Hương. 1.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(123)</span> Tiểu học Tiên Cát 2015 - 2016 Week 20: From 11th to 15th Jan, 2016 Preparing: 08/1/2016 Teaching: 11-15/1/2016 Unit 12: What does your father do? Period 79 Lesson 1 part 1+2 I. Aims 1. Knowledge: -Ps will be able to ask and answer questions about someone’s job 2. Skills: - Practice speaking, listening skills, do exercises in the book 3. Language - Sentence Partners: What does your.....do?- He’s/she’s....... - Vocabulary: farmer, nurse, driver, factory worker, job, interview, job II. Teaching methods: - Communicative approach. Techniques:+ Ask and answer (say individually) + Work in pairs/ groups. + Discuss. III. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. VI. Teaching processes: 1. Class organization: - Greeting - Checking for the students' attendance. 2. Oral test: - Check pupils: write the new words and modal sentence 3. New lesson Teacher’s activities Ps’ activities Warm up ask Ps to read the chant What time do you go to The whole class school? 1. Look, listen and repeat. T-WC Give a few minutes for Ps to look at the four pictures and story. Tell Ps that they are going to ask and answer questions about Job. Ask them to look at the pictures to identify the context in The whole class which language is used. Ask questions such as Who are they? What are they doing? Who’s interviewing whom in picture a? T- WC What does Mai’s father do? What does her mother do? Play the recording for Ps to listen and say along. Do choral and The whole class individual repeat Have Ps to find out the new structure. Whole class repeats it for several times T-WC 2. Point and say. New words: farmer nurse driver factory worker job interview job Modal sentence: What does your.....do?- He’s/she’s....... T-WC Nguyễn Thị Thanh Hương. 1.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(124)</span> Tiểu học Tiên Cát 2015 - 2016 Put the question and answer on the board and have Ps repeat them a few times. T-WC Point to the first picture and model the task with one P, using the expressions in the bubbles and the phrases under the T-WC picture. Ask Ps to say the sentences chorally and individually. Repeat the same procedure with the rest of the pictures. Work in pairs Ask Ps to work in pairs, using the prompts in the bubbles and the pictures. Select some pairs to role-play the dialogue in front of the class. Work in pairs. Ask your partners about the jobs of their family members The whole class Tell Ps that they are going to practice asking and answering about their family members with their friends. Work in pairs Have Ps work in pairs. Go around, offer help and correct the pronunciation, if necessary. Call a few pairs to act out the dialogue in front of the class. 4. Consolidation - Consolidate the content of the lesson 5. Home link - Do exercises in the workbook. Learn by heart the new words and structure. Prepare the next lesson. -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Week 20: From 11th to 15th Jan, 2016 Preparing: 08/1/2016 Teaching: 11-15/1/2016 Unit 12: What does your father do? Period 80 Lesson 1 part 3+4+5 I. Aims 1. Knowledge: - Ps will be able to ask and answer questions about someone’s job 2. Skills: - Practice writing, listening skills, do exercises in the book 3. Language - Sentence Partners: What does your.....do?- He’s/she’s....... - Vocabulary: farmer, nurse, driver, factory worker, job, interview, job II. Teaching methods: - Communicative approach. Techniques:+ Ask and answer (say individually) + Work in pairs/ groups. + Discuss. III. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. VI. Teaching processes: 1. Class organization: - Greeting - Checking for the students' attendance. 2. Oral test: - Check pupils: write the new words and modal sentence Nguyễn Thị Thanh Hương. 1.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(125)</span> Tiểu học Tiên Cát 2015 - 2016 3. New lesson Teacher’s activities Ps’ activities Warm up Ask and answer about someone’s job Pair work 3. Listen and tick. Introduce the activity and ask Ps what Jobs are shown in the T-WC pictures. Point to each character and ask What does he/she do?. Tell Ps that they are going to listen to an interview between Nam and Quan about Quan’s family and tick the correct The whole class pictures. Play the recording three times for Ps to listen, do the task and T- WC check their answers. Get Ps to swap and check their answers before checking as The whole class class. Key: 1. father: a factory worker 2. mother/ a teacher 4. sister/ a nurse 4. Look and write. Introduce the activity and ask Ps what Jobs are shown in the T-WC pictures. Get Ps time to read the sentences and identify the missing words. Set a time limit for Ps to fill the gaps. Pairs work Go around, offer help, if necessary. Get Ps to swap and check their answers before checking as a class. Write the correct answers on the board for Ps to copy T-WC down their notebooks. Call some Ps to read complete sentences aloud Key: 1. family 2. farmer 3. is a nurse 4. is a driver 5. is a factory worker 6. a pupil T-WC 6. Let’s sing. Tell Ps that they are going to sing the My family song. Read each line and check comprehension. Sing each line and have Ps repeat it. When Ps are familiar with the tune, ask them Groups work to sing and do the actions. Ask groups of Ps to sit face to face and practice singing and Groups work doing the actions. Call a group of five to sing the song and do the actions. Have the whole sing the song and do the actions. 4. Consolidation - Consolidate the content of the lesson 5. Home link - Do exercises in the work book. Prepare the next lesson. ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------. Nguyễn Thị Thanh Hương. 1.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(126)</span> Tiểu học Tiên Cát 2015 - 2016 Week 21: From 18th to 22nd Jan, 2016 Preparing: 12/1/2016 Teaching: 18-22/1/2016 Unit 12: What does your father do? Period 81 Lesson 2 part 1+2+3 I. Aims 1. Knowledge: - Ps will be able to ask and answer questions about places to work 2. Skills: - Practice speaking, listening skills, do exercises in the book 3. Language - Sentence Partners: Where does he/she work? - He/She works in..... - Vocabulary: hospital, field, factory, office II. Teaching methods: - Communicative approach. Techniques: + Ask and answer (say individually) + Work in pairs/ groups. + Discuss. III. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. VI. Teaching processes: 1. Class organization: - Greeting - Checking for the students' attendance. 2. Oral test: - Check pupils: write the new words and modal sentence 3. New lesson Teacher’s activities Ps’ activities Warm up: Sing My family song Whole class 1. Look, listen and repeat. Tell Ps that they are going to find out about a game played by T-WC Nam and Mai. Give them a few second to look at the pictures and read the text before playing the recording to Ps to repeat. The whole class Check their comprehension by asking: Who's the boy/girl? What are they playing? Where does the doctor in the picture work? How about the worker? the farmer? Where does he/she T- WC work? Check comprehension. Play the recording, Ps listen and repeat the text a few times. The whole class Play the recording for Ps to listen and say along. Have Ps to find out the new structure. Whole class repeats it The whole class for several times. And find out the new words and the new structure 2. Point and say. Vocabulary: T-WC in a hospital in a field in a factory in an office Sentence Partners: Where does he/ she work? Nguyễn Thị Thanh Hương. 1.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(127)</span> Tiểu học Tiên Cát 2015 - 2016 - He/She works in..... Tell Ps that they are going to practice asking and answering T-WC questions about the time for daily activities. Ask Ps to look at the four pictures to teach the phases. Have Ps to look at the Pairs work bubbles to understand how to ask and answer questions. Point to the first picture and model the task with one P, using the Pairs work sentences in the bubbles and the phrase under the picture. Get Ps to work in pairs, using the prompts in the bubbles and the The whole class pictures. Select some pairs to demonstrate the task in front of the class. 3. Let’s talk Tell Ps that they are going to revise what they have learnt in Pairs work Lesson 1 and Lesson 2. Have Ps work in pairs: ask and answer the questions What does your....do? Where does he/she work? Pairs work And the other gives the answers. Then they swap roles. Call on a few pairs to act out the dialogue in front of the whole class. Correct the pronunciation if necessary. 4. Consolidation - Consolidate the content of the lesson 5. Homework - Do exercises in the workbook. Learn by heart the new words and structure. Prepare the next lesson. -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Week 21: From 18th to 22nd Jan, 2016 Preparing: 12/1/2016 Teaching: 18-22/1/2016 Unit 12: What does your father do? Period 82 Lesson 2 part 4+5+6 I. Aims 1. Knowledge: - Ps will be able to ask and answer questions about places to work 2. Skills: - Practice writing, listening skills, do exercises in the book 3. Language - Sentence Partners: Where does he/ she work? - He/She works in..... - Vocabulary: hospital, field, factory, office II. Teaching methods: - Communicative approach. Techniques: + Ask and answer (say individually) + Work in pairs/ groups. + Discuss. III. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. VI. Teaching processes: 1. Class organization: - Greeting - Checking for the students' attendance. 2. Oral test: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Hương. 1.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(128)</span> Tiểu học Tiên Cát 2015 - 2016 - Check pupils: write the new words and modal sentence 3. New lesson Teacher’s activities Ps’ activities Warm up ask S some questions about someone’s jobs Individual 4. Listen and number Introduce the activity and give a few seconds for Ps to look at the pictures. Check comprehension by eliciting Ps’ answers to T-WC questions such as: What can you see? What does he/she do? What is her/his job? Where does he/she work? Play the The whole class recording for Ps number the pictures ask them to focus on the jobs of the people. Play the recording again for Ps to check their answer. T- WC Get Ps to swap and check their answers before checking as class. Key 1. c 2. a 3. d 4. b 5. Look and write. Introduce the activity and give a few seconds for Ps to look at The whole class the pictures. Check comprehension by eliciting Ps’ answers to questions such as: What can you see? What does he/she do? What is her/his job? Where does he/she work? Set a time limit for Ps to do the task independently. Go around Groups work and offer help, if necessary Get them to swap their answers before checking as a class. Call some Ps to write the answers Key: 1. a doctor/ a nurse, in a hospital 2. a farmer/ in a field 6. Let’s play - Tell Ps that they are going to play game: Pelmanism. Prepare cards with jobs and the workplaces for the jobs. Remind Ps how to play game in pairs, Ps take turns turning over a pair of cards. If the cards show a job and a workplace T-WC that match, the player scores a point and continues to turn over another pair of cards. If they do not match, the other player has a turn. The player who gets the most points will be the winner. Ps can make sentence with the words on the card they have to Pairs work get more points 4. Consolidation - Consolidate the content of the lesson 5. Home link - Do exercises in the workbook. Learn by heart the new words and structure. Prepare the next lesson. ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------. Nguyễn Thị Thanh Hương. 1.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(129)</span> Tiểu học Tiên Cát 2015 - 2016 Week 21: From 18th to 22nd Jan, 2016 Preparing: 12/1/2016 Teaching: 18-22/1/2016 Unit 12: What does your father do? Period 83 Lesson 3 part 1+2+3 I. Aims 1. Knowledge: - Ps will be able to ask and answer questions about places to work and someone’s job, practise saying the sounds of the letters ie and ea in the words and in the sentences 2. Skills: - Practice speaking, listening skills, do exercises in the book 3. Language - Sentence Partners: Where does he/ she work? - He/She works in..... - Vocabulary: hospital, field, factory, office II. Teaching methods: - Communicative approach. Techniques: + Ask and answer (say individually) + Work in pairs/ groups. + Discuss. III. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. VI. Teaching processes: 1. Class organization: - Greeting - Checking for the students' attendance. 2. Oral test: - Check pupils: write the new words and modal sentence 3. New lesson Teacher’s activities Ps’ activities Warm up Ask and answer Qs about where someone works Pairs work 1 .Listen and repeat. Tell Ps that they are going to practice saying the letters, words, T-WC sentences in the book. Put the phonics letters ie and ea on the board and say them a few times. Play the recording and ask Ps The whole class to repeat a few times. Prompt Ps to say the words and sentences, paying attention to the target phonics letters. Do T- WC chorally repetition of the words and sentences unit Ps feel confident. Get some Ps to say the sentences in front of the The whole class class. 2. Listen and circle. Then say sentences with the circled. Tell Ps that they are going to listen to two sentences and circle the correct words. Give them a few seconds to read the words The whole class in silence. Play the recording so they can listen and circle the words focus the words with the sound ie/ea while listening. Play the recording again for Ps to check their answer The whole class Get Ps to swap and check their answers before checking as Nguyễn Thị Thanh Hương. 1.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(130)</span> Tiểu học Tiên Cát 2015 - 2016 class. Ask Ps to read the sentences aloud Key: 1. b Where’s my piece of chocolate? 2. b Miss Hien is reading a dictation. 3. Let’s chant. Tell Ps that they are going to say the Jobs and places of work chant. Say the chant and check comprehension. Have Ps repeat T-WC every line of the chant. When they are familiar with the rhythm, show them how to say the chant and do the actions. Divide the class into three groups to say the chant. The whole class Get groups of Ps to sit face to face and practice chanting and doing the actions. Get around and offer help, if necessary. Call two groups to the front of the class to chant and do the Groups work actions. The rest class claps along the rhythm. 4 .Consolidation - Consolidate the content of the lesson 5. Homework - Do exercises in the workbook. Learn by heart the new words and structure. Prepare the next lesson. ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Week 21: From 18th to 22nd Jan, 2016 Preparing: 12/1/2016 Teaching: 18-22/1/2016 Unit 12: What does your father do? Period 84 Lesson 3 part 4+5+6 I. Aims 1. Knowledge:- Ps will be able to ask and answer questions about places to work and someone’s job. 2. Skills: - Practice reading, writing skills, do exercises in the book 3. Language - Sentence Partners: Where does he/ she work? - He/She works in..... - Vocabulary: hospital, field, factory, office II. Teaching methods: - Communicative approach. Techniques: + Ask and answer (say individually) + Work in pairs/ groups. + Discuss. III. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. VI. Teaching processes: 1. Class organization: - Greeting - Checking for the students' attendance. 2. Oral test: - Check pupils: write the new words and modal sentence 3. New lesson Teacher’s activities Ps’ activities Nguyễn Thị Thanh Hương. 1.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(131)</span> Tiểu học Tiên Cát 2015 - 2016 Warm up ask Ps to read the chant Jobs and places to work The whole class 4. Read and complete. Tell Ps that they are going to read about an interview between The whole class Mai and Phong and complete the sentences. Have them to read the incomplete table under the text and elicit what the words they need to fill in the gaps. Ask Ps to read the text to find the Groups work information to complete the table. Give Ps time to do the task. Go around, offer help, if necessary. Get Ps to swap and check their answers before checking as T_ WC class. Call a pair to ask and answer question about Phong’s family The whole class members if time available Key: 1. father/ teacher/ Le Hong Phong primary school 2. mother/ nurse/ Thanh Nhan hospital 3. brother/ worker/ car factory 5. Write about the jobs of your family members and where they work. Tell Ps that they are going to write a short paragraph about the Individually work of your family members and where they work. Tell Ps to tick a photo of their family next to the paragraph, or draw simple tick figures. Set the time limit for them to do the task. When time is up, get Ps to swap and correct their writing. Give Ps time to do the task. Go around, offer help, if necessary. T-WC Get Ps to swap and check their writings before checking as class. Call a few Ps to read their writings aloud Pairs work 6. Project. Tell Ps that they are going to interview two friends about their parents’ jobs and the places where they work. Complete the Groups work tables when you interview your classmates. Prepare the interview questions with the class and write them on the board for Ps to practise. Set time limit for Ps to do their interviews Individuals work When Ps finish interviewing, ask them to report to the class. Ex: Hello, everyone. My name’s...My first interview is with ..... His/her father is....She/He works in.......The second interview is with ... His/ Her mother is......He/She works in....And that’s the end of my report. Thanks for listening. 4. Consolidation - Consolidate the content of the lesson 5. Homework - Do exercises in the workbook. Learn by heart the new words and structure. Prepare the next lesson. ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------. Nguyễn Thị Thanh Hương. 1.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(132)</span> Tiểu học Tiên Cát 2015 - 2016 Week 22: From 27th to 03rd Jan, 2016 Preparing: 20/1/2016 Teaching: 27/01-03/02/2016 Unit 13: Would you like some milk? Period 85 Lesson 1 part 1+2 I. Aims 1. Knowledge: - Ps will be able to ask and answer questions about favourite food and drink 2. Skills: - Practice speaking, listening skills, do exercises in the book 3. Language - Sentence Partners: What’s your favourite food/drink?- It’s............... - Vocabulary: drink, food, chicken, milk, orange juice, beef, pork, water II. Teaching methods: - Communicative approach. Techniques: + Ask and answer (say individually) + Work in pairs/ groups. + Discuss. III. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. VI. Teaching processes: 1. Class organization: - Greeting - Checking for the students' attendance. 2. Oral test: - Check pupils: write the new words and modal sentence 3. New lesson Teacher’s activities Ps’ activities Warm up ask Ps to read the chant Jobs and places to work The whole class 1. Look, listen and repeat. Give a few minutes for Ps to look at the four pictures and T-WC story. Tell Ps that they are going to ask and answer questions about food and drink. Ask them to look at the pictures to identify the context in which language is used. Ask questions such as Who are they? Where are they? What are they doing? The whole class What’s their favourite food/drink? Play the recording for Ps to listen and say along. Do choral and T- WC individual repeat Have Ps to find out the new structure. Whole class repeats it The whole class for several times 2. Point and say. New words: T-WC drink food chicken water milk orange juice beef pork Modal sentence: What’s your favourite food/drink?- It’s......... Put the question and answer on the board and have Ps repeat Nguyễn Thị Thanh Hương. 1.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(133)</span> Tiểu học Tiên Cát 2015 - 2016 them a few times. T-WC Point to the first picture and model the task with one P, using the expressions in the bubbles and the phrases under the T-WC picture. Ask Ps to say the sentences chorally and individually. Repeat the same procedure with the rest of the pictures. T-WC Ask Ps to work in pairs, using the prompts in the bubbles and the pictures. Select some pairs to role-play the dialogue in Work in pairs front of the class. Work in pairs. Ask your partners about their favourite food and drink. Tell Ps that they are going to practice asking and answering about their food and drink using What is your favourite food/ The whole class drink? Have Ps work in pairs. Go around, offer help and correct the Work in pairs pronunciation, if necessary. Call a few pairs to act out the dialogue in front of the class. 4. Consolidation - Consolidate the content of the lesson 5. Home link - Do exercises in the workbook. Learn by heart the new words and structure. Prepare the next lesson. -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Week 22: From 27th to 03rd Jan, 2016 Preparing: 20/1/2016 Teaching: 27/01-03/02/2016 Unit 13: Would you like some milk? Period 86 Lesson 1 part 3+4+5 I. Aims 1. Knowledge: - Ps will be able to ask and answer questions about favourite food and drink 2. Skills: - Practice writing, listening skills, do exercises in the book 3. Language - Sentence Partners: What’s your favourite food/drink?- It’s............... - Vocabulary: drink, food, chicken, milk, orange juice, beef, pork, water II. Teaching methods: - Communicative approach. Techniques:+ Ask and answer (say individually) + Work in pairs/ groups. + Discuss. III. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. VI. Teaching processes: 1. Class organization: - Greeting - Checking for the students' attendance. 2. Oral test: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Hương. 1.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(134)</span> Tiểu học Tiên Cát 2015 - 2016 - Check pupils: write the new words and modal sentence 3. New lesson Teacher’s activities Ps’ activities Warm up answer questions about favourite food and drink Pair work 3. Listen and tick. Tell Ps that they are going to listen to three dialogues about T-WC some children’s favourite food and drink and tick the correct pictures. Have them look at the pictures to identify the food The whole class and drink. check understanding Play the recording three times for Ps to listen, do the task and T- WC check their answers. Get Ps to swap and check their answers before checking as The whole class class. Key: 1. b 2.c 3.a 4. Look and write. Tell Ps that they are going to write the answers the questions about favourite food and drink suggested in the pictures. T-WC Give them a few seconds to look at the pictures and write the answers. Set a time limit for Ps to do. Go around, offer help, if necessary. Get Ps to swap and check their answers before checking as a Pairs work class. Write the correct answers on the board for Ps to copy down their notebooks. Call some Ps to read complete sentences aloud T-WC Key: 1. It’s chicken 2. It’s orange juice 3. It’s fish and water 6. Let’s sing. Tell Ps that they are going to sing the My favourite food and T-WC drink song. Read each line and check comprehension. Sing each line and have Ps repeat it. When Ps are familiar with the tune, ask them to sing and do the actions. Ask groups of Ps to sit face to face and practice singing and Groups work doing the actions. Call a group of five to sing the song and do the actions. Groups work Have the whole sing the song and do the actions. 4. Consolidation - Consolidate the content of the lesson 5. Home link - Do exercises in the work book. Prepare the next lesson. ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------. Nguyễn Thị Thanh Hương. 1.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(135)</span> Tiểu học Tiên Cát 2015 - 2016 Week 22: From 27th to 03rd Jan, 2016 Preparing: 20/1/2016 Teaching: 27/01-03/02/2016 Unit 13: Would you like some milk? Period 87 Lesson 2 part 1+2+3 I. Aims 1. Knowledge: - Ps will be able to offer someone food or drink and accept/ decline someone’s offer 2. Skills: - Practice speaking, listening skills, do exercises in the book 3. Language - Sentence Partners: Would you like some.....? - Yes, please/ No, thanks - Vocabulary: noodles, lemonade, bread, rice, vegetables II. Teaching methods: - Communicative approach. Techniques: + Ask and answer (say individually) + Work in pairs/ groups. + Discuss. III. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. VI. Teaching processes: 1. Class organization: - Greeting - Checking for the students' attendance. 2. Oral test: - Check pupils: write the new words and modal sentence 3. New lesson Teacher’s activities Ps’ activities Warm up: Sing My favourite food and drink song Whole class 1. Look, listen and repeat. Tell Ps that they are going to read a story in which the T-WC characters offer food and drink using Would you like some.....? - Yes, please/ No, thanks. Give them a few second to look at The whole class the pictures and read the text before playing the recording to Ps to repeat. Check their comprehension by asking: Who's the boy/girl? Where are they? What are they doing? Check T- WC comprehension. Play the recording, Ps listen and repeat the text a few times. The whole class Play the recording for Ps to listen and say along. Have Ps to find out the new structure. Whole class repeats it The whole class for several times. And find out the new words and the new structure 2. Point and say. Vocabulary: T-WC noodles lemonade bread rice vegetables Sentence Partners: Would you like some.....? Nguyễn Thị Thanh Hương. 1.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(136)</span> Tiểu học Tiên Cát 2015 - 2016 - Yes, please/ No, thanks. Tell Ps that they are going to practice offering someone food T-WC or drink and accepting/ declining someone’s offer. Ask Ps to look at the four pictures to teach the new words. Have Ps to Pairs work look at the bubbles to understand how to offer someone food or drink and accepting/ declining someone’s offer. Point to the Pairs work first picture and model the task with one P, using the sentences in the bubbles and the new words under the picture. Get Ps to The whole class work in pairs, using the prompts in the bubbles and the pictures. Select some pairs to demonstrate the task in front of the class. Pairs work 3. Let’s talk Tell Ps that they are going to revise what they have learnt in Lesson 1 and Lesson 2. Have Ps work in pairs: ask and answer the questions What is your favourite food/drink? Would you like some.....? and how to respond to them. Call on a few pairs to act out the dialogue in front of the whole Pairs work class. Correct the pronunciation if necessary. 4. Consolidation - Consolidate the content of the lesson 5. Homework - Do exercises in the workbook. Learn by heart the new words and structure. Prepare the next lesson. -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Week 22: From 27th to 03rd Jan, 2016 Preparing: 20/1/2016 Teaching: 27/01-03/02/2016 Unit 13: Would you like some milk? Period 88 Lesson 2 part 4+5+6 I. Aims 1. Knowledge: - Ps will be able to offer someone food or drink and accept/ decline someone’s offer 2. Skills: - Practice writing, listening skills, do exercises in the book 3. Language - Sentence Partners: Would you like some.....? - Yes, please/ No, thanks - Vocabulary: noodles, lemonade, bread, rice, vegetables II. Teaching methods: - Communicative approach. Techniques: + Ask and answer (say individually) + Work in pairs/ groups. + Discuss. III. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. VI. Teaching processes: 1. Class organization: - Greeting Nguyễn Thị Thanh Hương. 1.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(137)</span> Tiểu học Tiên Cát 2015 - 2016 - Checking for the students' attendance. 2. Oral test: - Check pupils: write the new words and modal sentence 3. New lesson Teacher’s activities Ps’ activities Warm up Sing My favourite food and drink song Individual 4. Listen and number Introduce the activity and give a few seconds for Ps to look at the pictures. Check comprehension by eliciting Ps’ answers to T-WC questions such as: What can you see? What food/ drink in these pictures? Play the recording for Ps number the pictures The whole class ask them to focus on the jobs of the people. Play the recording again for Ps to check their answer. Get Ps to swap and check their answers before checking as T- WC class. Key 1. b 2. c 3. a 4. d 5. Look and write. tell Ps that they are going to complete the menu, using the pictures cues. Have them to look at the two worked examples The whole class in the menu. Then ask them to look at the pictures and write the words for te food and drink. Check understanding. Set a time limit for Ps to do the task independently. Go around and offer help, if necessary Groups work Get them to swap their answers before checking as a class. Call some Ps to write the answers Key: 1. milk 2. lemonade 3. water 4. fish 5. rice 6. bread 6. Let’s play - Tell Ps that they are going to play game: Food or drink? Write Food and Drink on two sides of the board. Ten write T-WC fish under food and milk under drink Call two groups to the front of the class. They should take turns to write the name of a food or drink under the wrong category is out of the game. Then another group comes out and Group work countries. the groups which stays until the end of the game is the winner. 4. Consolidation - Consolidate the content of the lesson 5. Home link - Do exercises in the workbook. Learn by heart the new words and structure. Prepare the next lesson. ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------. Nguyễn Thị Thanh Hương. 1.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(138)</span> Tiểu học Tiên Cát 2015 - 2016 Week 23: From 15th to 19th Feb, 2016 Preparing: 20/1/2016 Teaching: 15-19/02/2016 Unit 13: Would you like some milk? Period 89 Lesson 3 part 1+2+3 I. Aims 1. Knowledge: -Ps will be able to ask and answer questions about favourite food and drink and offer someone food or drink and accept/ decline someone’s offer, practise saying the sounds of the letters f and sh in the words and in the sentences 2. Skills: - Practice speaking, listening skills, do exercises in the book 3. Language - Sentence Partners: - Vocabulary: II. Teaching methods: - Communicative approach. Techniques: + Ask and answer (say individually) + Work in pairs/ groups. + Discuss. III. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. VI. Teaching processes: 1. Class organization: - Greeting - Checking for the students' attendance. 2. Oral test: - Check pupils: write the new words and modal sentence 3. New lesson Teacher’s activities Ps’ activities Warm up Ps offer someone food or drink and accept/ decline Pairs work someone’s offer T-WC 1. Listen and repeat. Tell Ps that they are going to practice saying the letters, words, The whole class sentences in the book. Put the phonics letters f and sh on the board and say them a few times. Play the recording and ask Ps to repeat a few times. Prompt Ps to say the words and T- WC sentences, paying attention to the target phonics letters. Do chorally repetition of the words and sentences unit Ps feel The whole class confident. Get some Ps to say the sentences in front of the class. 2. Listen and tick. Then write and say aloud. Tell Ps that they are going to listen to two sentences and circle The whole class the correct words. Give them a few seconds to read the words in silence. Play the recording so they can listen and tick the words focus the words with the sound f and sh while listening. The whole class Play the recording again for Ps to check their answer Nguyễn Thị Thanh Hương. 1.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(139)</span> Tiểu học Tiên Cát 2015 - 2016 Get Ps to swap and check their answers before checking as class. Ask Ps to read the sentences aloud Key: 1. a 2. b 3. a 4. b 3. Let’s chant. Tell Ps that they are going to say the Would you like some fish? chant. Say the chant and check comprehension. Have Ps T-WC repeat every line of the chant. When they are familiar with the rhythm, show them how to say the chant and do the actions. Divide the class into three groups to say the chant. The whole class Get groups of Ps to sit face to face and practice chanting and doing the actions. Get around and offer help, if necessary. Call two groups to the front of the class to chant and do the Groups work actions. The rest class claps along the rhythm. 4 .Consolidation - Consolidate the content of the lesson 5. Homework - Do exercises in the workbook. Learn by heart the new words and structure. Prepare the next lesson. ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Week 23: From 15th to 19th Feb, 2016 Preparing: 20/0 1/2016 Teaching: 15-19/02/2016 Unit 13: Would you like some milk? Period 90 Lesson 3 part 4+5+6 I. Aims 1. Knowledge: -Ps will be able to ask and answer questions about favourite food and drink and offering someone food or drink and accepting/ declining someone’s offer 2. Skills: - Practice reading, writing skills, do exercises in the book 3. Language - Sentence Partners: - Vocabulary: II. Teaching methods: - Communicative approach. Techniques: + Ask and answer (say individually) + Work in pairs/ groups. + Discuss. III. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. VI. Teaching processes: 1. Class organization: - Greeting - Checking for the students' attendance. 2. Oral test: - Check pupils: write the new words and modal sentence 3. New lesson Teacher’s activities Ps’ activities Nguyễn Thị Thanh Hương. 1.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(140)</span> Tiểu học Tiên Cát 2015 - 2016 Warm up ask Ps to read the chant Would you like some fish? The whole class 4. Read and complete. Tell Ps that they are going to read the text and complete the The whole class table. Have them to read the information to fill in the blanks. tell them to focus on Linda’s and Peter’s favourite food and drink. . Give Ps time to do the task. Go around, offer help, if Groups work necessary. Get Ps to swap and check their answers before checking as class. T_ WC Call a pair to ask and answer question their favourite food and drink The whole class Key: favourite food favourite drink beef orange juice chicken lemonade 5. Write about your favourite food and drink] Pairs work Tell Ps that they are going to write a short paragraph about their favourite food and drink. Have them work in pairs or groups to discuss what they are going to write in the blank. Set the time limit for them to do the task. When time is up, get Ps Individually to swap and correct their writing. Give Ps time to do the task. Go around, offer help, if necessary. Get Ps to swap and check their writings before checking as class. Call a few Ps to read their writings aloud T-WC 6. Project. Tell Ps that they are going to interview their classmates about their favourite food and drink and then report the results to the Pairs work class. Prepare the interview questions with the class and write them on the board for Ps to practise. Set time limit for Ps to do Groups work their interviews When Ps finish interviewing, ask them to report to the class. Ex: Here are the results of my interviews. Tien’s favourite food is fish and his favourite drink is orange juice. Tam’s Individuals work favourite food is pork and her favourite drink is lemonade. And that’s the end of my report. Thanks for listening. 4. Consolidation - Consolidate the content of the lesson 5. Homework - Do exercises in the workbook. Learn by heart the new words and structure. Prepare the next lesson. ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------. Nguyễn Thị Thanh Hương. 1.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(141)</span> Tiểu học Tiên Cát 2015 - 2016 Week 23 Preparing: 20/1/2016 Teaching: .....................2016 Unit 14: What does he look like? Period 91 Lesson 1 part 1+2 I. Aims 1. Knowledge: -Ps will be able to ask and answer questions about someone’s physical appearance 2. Skills: - Practice speaking, listening skills, do exercises in the book 3. Language - Sentence Partners: What does he/she look like?- He’s/She’s............... - Vocabulary: tall, short, slim, old, young, big, small, strong, thick, thin. e-mail, footballer II. Teaching methods: - Communicative approach. Techniques: + Ask and answer (say individually) + Work in pairs/ groups. + Discuss. III. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. VI. Teaching processes: 1. Class organization: - Greeting - Checking for the students' attendance. 2. Oral test: - Check pupils: write the new words and modal sentence 3. New lesson Teacher’s activities Ps’ activities Warm up ask Ps to read the chant Would you like some fish? The whole class 1. Look, listen and repeat. Give a few minutes for Ps to look at the four pictures identify T-WC the characters and the context in which the language is used. Ask questions such as Who are they? Where are they? What are they doing? What does he look like? Check The whole class comprehension. Play the recording for Ps to listen and say along. Do choral and T- WC individual repeat Have Ps to find out the new structure. Whole class repeats it The whole class for several times 2. Point and say. New words: T-WC tall short slim old thin young e-mail footballer strong thick Modal sentence: What does he/she look like?- He’s/She’s............... Nguyễn Thị Thanh Hương. 1.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(142)</span> Tiểu học Tiên Cát 2015 - 2016 Put the question and answer on the board and have Ps repeat T-WC them a few times. Point to the first picture and model the task with one P, using T-WC the expressions in the bubbles and the phrases under the picture. Ask Ps to say the sentences chorally and individually. T-WC Repeat the same procedure with the rest of the pictures. Ask Ps to work in pairs, using the prompts in the bubbles and Work in pairs the pictures. Select some pairs to role-play the dialogue in front of the class. Work in pairs. Ask your partners about Tell Ps that they are going to practice asking and answering about the appearance of their classmates’ family members The whole class using What does he/she look like?- He’s/She’s...............Have Ps work in pairs. Go around, offer help and correct the pronunciation, if necessary. Work in pairs Call a few pairs to act out the dialogue in front of the class. 4. Consolidation - Consolidate the content of the lesson 5. Home link - Do exercises in the workbook. Learn by heart the new words and structure. Prepare the next lesson. -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Week 23 Preparing: 20/1/2016 Teaching: .....................2016 Unit 14: What does he look like? Period 92 Lesson 1 part 3+4+5 I. Aims 1. Knowledge: - Ps will be able to ask and answer questions about someone’s physical appearance 2. Skills: - Practice writing, listening skills, do exercises in the book 3. Language - Sentence Partners: What does he/she look like?- He’s/She’s............... - Vocabulary: tall, short, slim, old, young, e-mail, footballer II. Teaching methods: - Communicative approach. Techniques:+ Ask and answer (say individually) + Work in pairs/ groups. + Discuss. III. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. VI. Teaching processes: 1. Class organization: - Greeting - Checking for the students' attendance. 2. Oral test: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Hương. 1.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(143)</span> Tiểu học Tiên Cát 2015 - 2016 - Check pupils: write the new words and modal sentence 3. New lesson Teacher’s activities Ps’ activities Warm up Ask and answer about someone’s physical Pair work appearance 3. Listen and tick. Tell Ps that they are going to listen to three dialogues about T-WC people’s physical appearance and tick the correct pictures. Have them look at the pictures to identify the appearance of The whole class the people. check understanding Play the recording three times for Ps to listen, do the task and T- WC check their answers. Get Ps to swap and check their answers before checking as The whole class class. Key: 1. c 2.c 3.a 4. Look and write. Tell Ps that they are going to complete the answer about someone’s appearance using the picture cues. T-WC Ask Ps to look at the pictures to identify the physical appearance of people in the four pictures. Ask them to write the questions and the answers. Set a time limit for Ps to do. Go around, offer help, if necessary. Get Ps to swap and check their answers before checking as a Pairs work class. Write the correct answers on the board for Ps to copy down their notebooks. Call some Ps to read complete sentences aloud T-WC Key: 1. He’s tall/ slim 2. she is short/young 3. They’re old 4. They’re young/tall 6. Let’s play. - Tell Ps that they are going to play game: Find someone T-WC who... using the words related to people’s physical appearance Divide the class into two groups. Say to Ps Find someone who’s tall/ thin,...the groups is the quickest to point to a Groups work classmate who fits that description and say the correct sentence Ex: Mai is tall gets a point. The group that gets most points Groups work wins 4. Consolidation - Consolidate the content of the lesson 5. Home link - Do exercises in the work book. Prepare the next lesson. ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------. Nguyễn Thị Thanh Hương. 1.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(144)</span> Tiểu học Tiên Cát 2015 - 2016 Week 24 Preparing: 27/1/2016 Teaching: .....................2016 Unit 14: What does he look like? Period 93 Lesson 2 part 1+2+3 I. Aims 1. Knowledge: - Ps will be able to make the comparisons 2. Skills: - Practice speaking, listening skills, do exercises in the book 3. Language - Sentence Partners: Who’s + (comparative)? - He/ She is + (comparative). - Vocabulary: thinner, bigger, smaller,.... II. Teaching methods: - Communicative approach. Techniques: + Ask and answer (say individually) + Work in pairs/ groups. + Discuss. III. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. VI. Teaching processes: 1. Class organization: - Greeting - Checking for the students' attendance. 2. Oral test: - Check pupils: write the new words and modal sentence 3. New lesson Teacher’s activities Ps’ activities Warm up: Ask and answer What does he/she look like? Pairs work 1. Look, listen and repeat. Tell Ps that they are going to listen to two boys asking and T-WC answering questions about their family members. Give them a few second to look at the pictures to identify the context in The whole class which the language is used. Ask them question such as: Who are the boys? What are they doing? and in picture c Nam is making a comparison between his father and his brother: My T- WC brother is taller than my father. Check comprehension. Play the recording, Ps listen and repeat the text a few times. The whole class Play the recording for Ps to listen and say along. Have Ps to find out the new structure. Whole class repeats it The whole class for several times. And find out the new words and the new structure 2. Point and say. Vocabulary: T-WC thinner bigger smaller stronger shorter thicker slimmer taller younger older.... Nguyễn Thị Thanh Hương. 1.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(145)</span> Tiểu học Tiên Cát 2015 - 2016 Sentence Partners: T-WC Who’s + (comparative)? - He/ She is + (comparative). Tell Ps that they are going to practice asking and answering questions to compare people’s appearance. Ask Ps to look at Pairs work the pictures to identify how is the language is used. Teach them the form and the meaning of the pairs of Adjs under the Pairs work pictures. Have Ps to look at the bubbles to understand how to use comparison. Point to the first picture and model the task The whole class with one P, using the sentences in the bubbles and the new words under the picture. Get Ps to work in pairs, using the prompts in the bubbles and the pictures. Pairs work Select some pairs to demonstrate the task in front of the class. 3. Let’s talk Tell Ps that they are going to revise what they have learnt in Lesson 1 and Lesson 2. Have Ps work in pairs: ask and answer the questions: What does he/she look like? Who’s + (comparative)? Pairs work Call on a few pairs to act out the dialogue in front of the whole class. Correct the pronunciation if necessary. 4. Consolidation - Consolidate the content of the lesson 5. Homework - Do exercises in the workbook. Learn by heart the new words and structure. Prepare the next lesson. -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Week 24 Preparing: 27/1/2016 Teaching: .....................2016 Unit 14: What does he look like? Period 94 Lesson 2 part 4+5+6 I. Aims 1. Knowledge: : - Ps will be able to make the comparisons 2. Skills: - Practice writing, listening skills, do exercises in the book 3. Language - Sentence Partners: Who’s + (comparative)? - He/ She is + (comparative). - Vocabulary: thinner, bigger, smaller,.... II. Teaching methods: - Communicative approach. Techniques: + Ask and answer (say individually) + Work in pairs/ groups. + Discuss. III. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. VI. Teaching processes: 1. Class organization: - Greeting Nguyễn Thị Thanh Hương. 1.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(146)</span> Tiểu học Tiên Cát 2015 - 2016 - Checking for the students' attendance. 2. Oral test: - Check pupils: write the new words and modal sentence 3. New lesson Teacher’s activities Warm up Ask and answer about classmate appearance using comparisons 4. Listen and number Tell Ps that they are going to listen to Nam’s description of his family and circle the correct answers. Ask PS to read the four incomplete sentences and guess the possible answers for each sentence. Check understanding. Play the recording for Ps to circle the answers . Play the recording again for Ps to check their answer. Get Ps to swap and check their answers before checking as class. Key 1. a 2. a 3. b 4. b 5. Look and write. Tell Ps that they are going to writ answers for the questions to make comparisons of people’s appearance, using the pictures cues. Have them to look at the pictures to identify the difference in appearance between the family members in each picture. Remind that we use than when making comparisons. Then ask them to read questions and write the answers. Check understanding. Set a time limit for Ps to do the task independently. Go around and offer help, if necessary Get them to swap their answers before checking as a class. Call some Ps to write the answers Key: 1. The brother is slimmer than the father. 2. The mother is shorter than the father. 3. The sister is older than the brother. 4. The brother is stronger than the father. 6. Let’s sing Tell Ps that they are going to sing the What does they look like? song. Read each line and check comprehension. Sing each line and have Ps repeat it. When Ps are familiar with the tune, ask them to sing and do the actions. Ask groups of Ps to sit face to face and practice singing and doing the actions. Call a group of five to sing the song and do the actions. Have the whole sing the song and do the actions. 4. Consolidation - Consolidate the content of the lesson 5. Home link Nguyễn Thị Thanh Hương. 1. Ps’ activities Pairs work T-WC The whole class T- WC. The whole class. Groups work. T-WC. Group work Group work.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(147)</span> Tiểu học Tiên Cát 2015 - 2016 - Do exercises in the workbook. Learn by heart the new words and structure. Prepare the next lesson. ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Week 24 Preparing: 27/1/2016 Teaching: .....................2016 Unit 14: What does he look like? Period 95 Lesson 3 part 1+2+3 I. Aims 1. Knowledge: -Ps will able to making the comparisons, asking and answering questions about someone’s physical appearance, practise saying the sounds of the letters th in the words and in the sentences 2. Skills: - Practice speaking, listening skills, do exercises in the book 3. Language - Sentence Partners: - Vocabulary: II. Teaching methods: - Communicative approach. Techniques: + Ask and answer (say individually) + Work in pairs/ groups. + Discuss. III. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. VI. Teaching processes: 1. Class organization: - Greeting - Checking for the students' attendance. 2. Oral test: - Check pupils: write the new words and modal sentence 3. New lesson Teacher’s activities Ps’ activities. Nguyễn Thị Thanh Hương. 1.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(148)</span> Tiểu học Tiên Cát 2015 - 2016 Warm up ask Ps sing the What does they look like? song. Pairs work 1 .Listen and repeat. T-WC Tell Ps that they are going to practice saying the letters, words, sentences in the book. Put the phonics letters th on the board The whole class and say them a few times. Play the recording and ask Ps to repeat a few times. Prompt Ps to say the words and sentences, paying attention to the target phonics letters. Do chorally T- WC repetition of the words and sentences unit Ps feel confident. Get some Ps to say the sentences in front of the class. The whole class 2. Listen and tick. Then write and say aloud. Tell Ps that they are going to listen to two sentences and circle the correct words. Give them a few seconds to read the words in silence. Play the recording so they can listen and tick the The whole class words focus the words with the sound th while listening. Play the recording again for Ps to check their answer Get Ps to swap and check their answers before checking as The whole class class. Ask Ps to read the sentences aloud Key: 1. a 2. b 3. a 4. b 3. Let’s chant. Tell Ps that they are going to say the This is my family chant. Say the chant and check comprehension. Have Ps repeat every line of the chant. When they are familiar with the rhythm, show them how to say the chant and do the actions. T-WC Divide the class into three groups to say the chant. Get groups of Ps to sit face to face and practice chanting and doing the actions. Get around and offer help, if necessary. The whole class Call two groups to the front of the class to chant and do the actions. The rest class claps along the rhythm. Groups work 4 .Consolidation - Consolidate the content of the lesson 5. Homework - Do exercises in the workbook. Learn by heart the new words and structure. Prepare the next lesson. ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Week 24 Preparing: 27/1/2016 Teaching: .....................2016 Unit 14: What does he look like? Period 96 Lesson 3 part 4+5+6 I. Aims 1. Knowledge-Ps will able to making the comparisons, asking and answering questions about someone’s physical appearance, practise saying the sounds of the letters th in the words and in the sentences Nguyễn Thị Thanh Hương. 1.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(149)</span> Tiểu học Tiên Cát 2015 - 2016 2. Skills: - Practice reading, writing skills, do exercises in the book 3. Language - Sentence Partners: - Vocabulary: II. Teaching methods: - Communicative approach. Techniques: + Ask and answer (say individually) + Work in pairs/ groups. + Discuss. III. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. VI. Teaching processes: 1. Class organization: - Greeting - Checking for the students' attendance. 2. Oral test: - Check pupils: write the new words and modal sentence 3. New lesson Teacher’s activities Ps’ activities Warm up ask Ps to read the chant This is my family The whole class 4. Read and write. Tell Ps that they are going to read an email about a girl’s The whole class family and write the answers to the questions. Have them to read the questions first. Ask them to read the email and focus on the information needed to answer the questions. Give Ps Pairs work time to do the task. Go around, offer help, if necessary. Get Ps to swap and check their answers before checking as class. T_ WC Call a pair to ask and answer question their favourite food and drink The whole class Key: 1. He is a teacher. 2. He is tall and slim. 3. She is beautiful. 4. Her brother is younger. 5. Marie is shorter. 5. Write Tell Ps that they are going to write an email to their friends to describe their family, using given words in the frame. Have T_ WC them read the given words and decide what they are going to write. Asks them to write about their father or mother’s appearance. Set the time limit for them to do the task. When Individually time is up, get Ps to swap and correct their writing. Give Ps time to do the task. Go around, offer help, if necessary. Get Ps to swap and check their writings before checking as class. Call a few Ps to read their writings aloud 6. Project. T-WC Ask Ps to bring a photo of their family and describe their family members to the class. Pairs work Ask them to think about what to say about their family Nguyễn Thị Thanh Hương. 1.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(150)</span> Tiểu học Tiên Cát 2015 - 2016 members: name, age, job, hobby, appearance... Get one P to do a demonstration in front of the class before Groups work starting the activity. Call some Ps to in front of the class to do the task. Monitor the activity and offer help if necessary. Individuals work Ex: This is my mother. her name is Ky. She’s fifty years old. She is not tall but thin. She is an officer. She works in an office in Viettri city. She likes cooking and watching TV. 4. Consolidation - Consolidate the content of the lesson 5. Homework - Do exercises in the workbook. Learn by heart the new words and structure. Prepare the next lesson. ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------. Week 25 Preparing: 12/2/2016 Teaching: .....................2016 Unit 15: When’s Children’s day? Period 97 Lesson 1 part 1+2 I. Aims 1. Knowledge: - Ps will be able to ask and answer questions about when a festival is 2. Skills: - Practice speaking, listening skills, do exercises in the book 3. Language - Sentence Partners: When’s Children’s day?- It’s on............... - Vocabulary: New Year, Children’s day, teachers’ day, Christmas, join, smart II. Teaching methods: - Communicative approach. Techniques: + Ask and answer (say individually) + Work in pairs/ groups. + Discuss. III. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. VI. Teaching processes: 1. Class organization: - Greeting - Checking for the students' attendance. 2. Oral test: - Check pupils: write the new words and modal sentence 3. New lesson Teacher’s activities Ps’ activities Warm up ask Ps sing the What does they look like? song. The whole class 1. Look, listen and repeat. Nguyễn Thị Thanh Hương 1.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(151)</span> Tiểu học Tiên Cát 2015 - 2016 Give a few minutes for Ps to look at the four pictures and T-WC story. Tell Ps that they are going to ask and answer questions about when a festival is. Ask them to look at the pictures to identify the context in which language is used. Ask questions such as Who are they? Where are they? What are they doing? The whole class When’s Children’s day? Play the recording for Ps to listen and say along. Do choral and T- WC individual repeat Have Ps to find out the new structure. Whole class repeats it The whole class for several times 2. Point and say. New words: T-WC New Year Children’s day teachers’ day Christmas join smart Modal sentence: When’s Children’s day?- It’s on............... Put the question and answer on the board and have Ps repeat them a few times. T-WC Point to the first picture and model the task with one P, using the expressions in the bubbles and the phrases under the T-WC picture. Ask Ps to say the sentences chorally and individually. T-WC Repeat the same procedure with the rest of the pictures. Ask Ps to work in pairs, using the prompts in the bubbles and Work in pairs the pictures. Select some pairs to role-play the dialogue in front of the class. Work in pairs. Ask your partners about holidays and festivals in Viet Nam and other countries. Tell Ps that they are going to practice asking and answering The whole class about their food and drink using: When’s...... ?- It’s on............... Have Ps work in pairs. Go around, offer help and correct the Work in pairs pronunciation, if necessary. Call a few pairs to act out the dialogue in front of the class. 4. Consolidation - Consolidate the content of the lesson 5. Home link - Do exercises in the workbook. Learn by heart the new words and structure. Prepare the next lesson. -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Week 25 Preparing: 12/2/2016 Teaching: .....................2016 Unit 15: When’s Children’s day? Period 98 Lesson 1 part 3+4+5 I. Aims 1. Knowledge: - Ps will be able to ask and answer questions about when a festival Nguyễn Thị Thanh Hương. 1.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(152)</span> Tiểu học Tiên Cát 2015 - 2016 2. Skills: - Practice writing, listening skills, do exercises in the book 3. Language - Sentence Partners: When’s Children’s day?- It’s on............... - Vocabulary: New Year, Children’s day, teachers’ day, Christmas, join, smart II. Teaching methods: - Communicative approach. Techniques:+ Ask and answer (say individually) + Work in pairs/ groups. + Discuss. III. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. VI. Teaching processes: 1. Class organization: - Greeting - Checking for the students' attendance. 2. Oral test: - Check pupils: write the new words and modal sentence 3. New lesson Teacher’s activities Ps’ activities Warm up Ask and answer about festivals Pair work 3. Listen and tick. Tell Ps that they are going to listen to three dialogues about T-WC some popular festivals and tick the correct pictures. Have them look at the pictures to identify the festivals (notes: Halloween The whole class is celebrated on 31st, October, where children dress as ghosts and ask neighbours for sweets. check understanding T- WC Play the recording three times for Ps to listen, do the task and check their answers. Get Ps to swap and check their answers before checking as The whole class class. Key: 1. b 2.a 3.c 4. Look and write. Tell Ps that they are going to complete the answers the questions about popular festivals suggested in the pictures. T-WC Give them a few seconds to look at the pictures and write the answers. Set a time limit for Ps to do. Go around, offer help, if necessary. Get Ps to swap and check their answers before checking as a Pairs work class. Write the correct answers on the board for Ps to copy down their notebooks. Call some Ps to read complete sentences aloud T-WC Key: 1. the twenty-fifth of December 2. the twentieth of November 3. the first of June 6. Let’s sing. Tell Ps that they are going to sing the Happy New Year song. T-WC Read each line and check comprehension. Sing each line and Nguyễn Thị Thanh Hương. 1.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(153)</span> Tiểu học Tiên Cát 2015 - 2016 have Ps repeat it. When Ps are familiar with the tune, ask them to sing and do the actions. Ask groups of Ps to sit face to face and practice singing and doing the actions. Groups work Call a group of five to sing the song and do the actions. Have the whole sing the song and do the actions. Groups work 4. Consolidation - Consolidate the content of the lesson 5. Home link - Do exercises in the work book. Prepare the next lesson. ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------. Week 25 Preparing: 12/2/2016 Teaching: .....................2016 Unit 15: When’s Children’s day? Period 99 Lesson 2 Part 1+2+3 I. Aims 1. Knowledge: - Ps will be able to ask and answer about what Ps do at a festival 2. Skills: - Practice speaking, listening skills, do exercises in the book 3. Language - Sentence Partners: What do you do at/on......? - I .... -Vocabulary: wear, decorate, lucky money, banh chung, firework display, grandparents II. Teaching methods: - Communicative approach. Techniques: + Ask and answer (say individually) + Work in pairs/ groups. + Discuss. III. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. VI. Teaching processes: 1. Class organization: - Greeting - Checking for the students' attendance. 2. Oral test: - Check pupils: write the new words and modal sentence 3. New lesson Teacher’s activities Ps’ activities Warm up: Sing Happy new year song Whole class Nguyễn Thị Thanh Hương 1.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(154)</span> Tiểu học Tiên Cát 2015 - 2016 1. Look, listen and repeat. Tell Ps that they are going find out about how to ask and T-WC answer questions about what people usually do at a festival. Give them a few second to look at the pictures and read the The whole class text before playing the recording to Ps to repeat. Check their comprehension by asking: Who are they? What are they doing? Check comprehension. T- WC Play the recording, Ps listen and repeat the text a few times. Play the recording for Ps to listen and say along. The whole class Have Ps to find out the new structure. Whole class repeats it for several times. And find out the new words and the new The whole class structure 2. Point and say. Vocabulary: wear decorate lucky money banh chung=sticky rice T-WC cake firework display grandparents Sentence Partners: What do you do at/on......? - I .... -Vocabulary: wear, decorate, lucky money, banh chung, T-WC firework display, grandparents. Tell Ps that they are going to practice asking and answering Pairs work the questions about what people do at Tet. Ask Ps to look at the four pictures to teach the new words. Have Ps to look at the Pairs work bubbles to understand how the language is used. Point to the first picture and model the task with one P, using the sentences The whole class in the bubbles and the new words under the picture. Get Ps to work in pairs, using the prompts in the bubbles and the pictures. Pairs work Select some pairs to demonstrate the task in front of the class. 3. Let’s talk Tell Ps that they are going to revise what they have learnt in Lesson 1 and Lesson 2. Have Ps work in pairs: ask and answer the questions When’s.....? and What do you do on/at...... ? how to answer them. ( go shopping, buy food and drink, play sports Pairs work and games, visit teachers and friends) Call on a few pairs to act out the dialogue in front of the whole class. Correct the pronunciation if necessary. 4. Consolidation - Consolidate the content of the lesson 5. Homework - Do exercises in the workbook. Learn by heart the new words and structure. Prepare the next lesson. -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Week 25 Preparing: 12/2/2016 Nguyễn Thị Thanh Hương. 1.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(155)</span> Tiểu học Tiên Cát 2015 - 2016 Teaching: .....................2016 Unit 15: When’s Children’s day? Period 100 Lesson 2 part 4+5+6 I. Aims 1. Knowledge: - Ps will be able to ask and answer about what Ps do at a festival 2. Skills: - Practice writing, listening skills, do exercises in the book 3. Language - Sentence Partners: What do you do at/on......? - I .... -Vocabulary: wear, decorate, lucky money, banh chung, firework display, grandparents II. Teaching methods: - Communicative approach. Techniques: + Ask and answer (say individually) + Work in pairs/ groups. + Discuss. III. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. VI. Teaching processes: 1. Class organization: - Greeting - Checking for the students' attendance. 2. Oral test: - Check pupils: write the new words and modal sentence 3. New lesson Teacher’s activities Ps’ activities Warm up ask S sing Happy New Year song The whole class 4. Listen and circle Introduce the activity and give a few seconds for Ps to read the sentences. Check comprehension by eliciting Ps’ answers to T-WC questions such as: When is Tet? What do they do at Tet? Ask P guess what Phong and his family do at Tet. Play the recording The whole class for Ps circle the right answers. Play the recording again for Ps to check their answer. Get Ps to swap and check their answers before checking as T- WC class. Key 1. a 2. b 3. b 4. a 5. Look and write. Tell Ps that they are going to complete the sentences about what characters do at Tet, using the pictures cues. The whole class Have them to read and look the incomplete sentences and identify the missing information. Then ask them to look at the pictures and write the words about where the characters are and what the characters do at Tet. Check understanding. Set a Groups work time limit for Ps to do the task independently. Go around and offer help, if necessary Get them to swap their answers before checking as a class. Call some Ps to write the answers Nguyễn Thị Thanh Hương. 1.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(156)</span> Tiểu học Tiên Cát 2015 - 2016 2. decorate the/their house 4. visit their grandparents. Key: 1. go shopping 3. make banh trung 6. Let’s play - Tell Ps that they are going to play game: Physical line-up Put Ps in groups. Write sentences about different festivals on large pieces of paper. Then cut each into two halves and put all T-WC the pieces into a box. The number of pieces in the box should be the same as the number of Ps in the group. Ask the Ps to each draw a piece of paper from the box. Each pupil should find the person with the other half of their Group work sentence and together read the sentence aloud. Continue the game with another group of pupils. 4. Consolidation - Consolidate the content of the lesson 5. Home link - Do exercises in the workbook. Learn by heart the new words and structure. Prepare the next lesson. ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------. Week 26 Preparing: 20/2/2016 Teaching: .....................2016 Unit 15: When’s Children’s day? Period 101 Lesson 3 part 1+2+3 I. Aims 1. Knowledge: -Ps will be able to ask and answer about what Ps do at a festival, when a festival is, practise saying the sounds of the letters cl and fl in the words and in the sentences 2. Skills: - Practice speaking, listening skills, do exercises in the book 3. Language - Sentence Partners: - Vocabulary: II. Teaching methods: - Communicative approach. Techniques: + Ask and answer (say individually) + Work in pairs/ groups. + Discuss. III. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. VI. Teaching processes: 1. Class organization: - Greeting - Checking for the students' attendance. 2. Oral test: - Check pupils: write the new words and modal sentence 3. New lesson Nguyễn Thị Thanh Hương. 1.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(157)</span> Tiểu học Tiên Cát 2015 - 2016 Teacher’s activities Ps’ activities Warm up ask S some questions about what do they do at Tet/ Pairs work on Children’s day 1 .Listen and repeat. Tell Ps that they are going to practice saying the letters, words, T-WC sentences in the book. Put the phonics letters cl and fl on the board and say them a few times. Play the recording and ask Ps The whole class to repeat a few times. Prompt Ps to say the words and sentences, paying attention to the target phonics letters. Do T- WC chorally repetition of the words and sentences unit Ps feel confident. Get some Ps to say the sentences in front of the The whole class class. 2. Listen and write. Then write and say aloud. Tell Ps that they are going to listen to two sentences and write the words you hear. Give them a few seconds to read the The whole class sentences in silence. Play the recording so they can listen and write the words focus the words with the sound cl and fl while listening. Play the recording again for Ps to check their answer The whole class Get Ps to swap and check their answers before checking as class. Ask Ps to read the sentences aloud Key: 1. flowers 2. close 3. clothes 4. floor 3. Let’s chant. Tell Ps that they are going to say the What do you do at Tet? T-WC chant. Say the chant and check comprehension. Have Ps repeat every line of the chant. When they are familiar with the rhythm, show them how to say the chant and do the actions. The whole class Divide the class into three groups to say the chant. Get groups of Ps to sit face to face and practice chanting and doing the actions. Get around and offer help, if necessary. Groups work Call two groups to the front of the class to chant and do the actions. The rest class claps along the rhythm. 4 .Consolidation - Consolidate the content of the lesson 5. Homework - Do exercises in the workbook. Learn by heart the new words and structure. Prepare the next lesson. ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Week 26 Preparing: 20/2/2016 Teaching: .....................2016 Unit 15: When’s Children’s day? Period 102 Lesson 3 part 4+5+6 I. Aims Nguyễn Thị Thanh Hương. 1.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(158)</span> Tiểu học Tiên Cát 2015 - 2016 1. Knowledge: -Ps will be able to ask and answer about what Ps do at a festival, when a festival is. 2. Skills: - Practice reading, writing skills, do exercises in the book 3. Language - Sentence Partners: - Vocabulary: II. Teaching methods: - Communicative approach. Techniques: + Ask and answer (say individually) + Work in pairs/ groups. + Discuss. III. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. VI. Teaching processes: 1. Class organization: - Greeting - Checking for the students' attendance. 2. Oral test: - Check pupils: write the new words and modal sentence 3. New lesson Teacher’s activities Ps’ activities. Nguyễn Thị Thanh Hương. 1.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(159)</span> Tiểu học Tiên Cát 2015 - 2016 Warm up ask Ps to read the chant Would you like some fish? The whole class 4. Read and write. Tell Ps that they are going to read the text and complete the The whole class sentences. Have them to read the incomplete sentences under the text and elicit what word they need to fill in the gaps. Focus Ps on what do they do at Tet. Ask them to read the text Groups work to find the appropriate information to complete the sentences. (What festivals is it soon? What does Mai’s family buy? What do they decorate, make and watch?). Give Ps time to do the task. Go around, offer help, if necessary. Get Ps to swap and check their answers before checking as T_ WC class. Call a pair to ask and answer question their favourite food and The whole class drink Key: 1. Tet 2. flowers 3. their house, banh chung 4. the firework displays 5. their grandparents, teachers, friends 5. Write about your Tet Tell Ps that they are going to write a short paragraph about Pairs work Tet. Have them work in pairs or groups to discuss what they are going to write in the blank focus what they do before and during Tet. Set the time limit for them to do the task. When time is up, get Ps to swap and correct their writing. Give Ps time to do the task. Go around, offer help, if Individually necessary. Get Ps to swap and check their writings before checking as class. Call a few Ps to read their writings aloud 6. Project. Tell Ps that they are going to make greeting cards for Tet and T-WC write wishes to their friends. Give each Ps a small card and some color pencils. Ask them to draw a card for Tet, After decorating the cards. Set time limit for Ps to do the task. When Ps finish call some them to the front of the class and Individuals work read aloud what their partners have written. EX : To: LyLy Wishes: Happy New Year! Have fun at Tet. From: Hoang Yen 4. Consolidation - Consolidate the content of the lesson 5. Homework - Do exercises in the workbook. Learn by heart the new words and structure. Prepare the next lesson. ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------. Nguyễn Thị Thanh Hương. 1.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(160)</span> Tiểu học Tiên Cát 2015 - 2016 Week 26 Preparing: 20/2/2016 Teaching: .....................2016 Period 103 REVIEW 3 I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: - Help students to review all the structure from unit 11 to unit 15 - Review the words, do exercises in the book 2. Skills: - Develop Ss listening, reading, writing skills, do exercises in book 3. Language focus: - Sentence Partners: from unit 11 to unit 15 - Vocabulary: from unit 11 to unit 15 II. Teaching methods: - Communicative approach. Techniques: + Ask and answer (say individually) + Work in pairs/ groups. + Discuss. III. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. VI. Teaching processes: 1. Class organization: - Greeting - Checking for the students' attendance. 2. Oral test: - Check pupils: check Sts' asking and answering questions about whether someone can do something 3. New lesson Teacher’s activities Ps’ activities Warm up: play game slap the board Group work 1. Listen and number. Tell Ps that they are going to listen and number the items The whole class in each picture. Give a few seconds for Ps to look at the picture. Check comprehension and give feedback. (Are there any flowers in the room? What are they like? What Guess the answers time is it now? What are the parents doing? What are they giving to the children? What can you see on the table? What are the food and drink?). Ps guess the answer Play the recording three times for Ps to listen, do the task Individually and check their answers. Get Ps to swap and check their answers before checking The whole class as class. Key: 1.b 2.a 3.d 4.e 5.c 2. Read and write. Tell Ps that they are going to complete the text about T-WC Hoa’s family. Ask Ps to guess what Hoa’s family does in Nguyễn Thị Thanh Hương 1.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(161)</span> Tiểu học Tiên Cát 2015 - 2016 the morning. Give Ps a few seconds to read the text in silence. Check comprehension and give feedback ( What time is it? What is the family doing? Is hr family still sleeping? What kinds of food do Hoa and her father like eating? What time does the family leave for work?) Get Ps time to do the task. Go around offer help, if necessary. Get Ps to swap and check their answers before checking Pairs work as a class. Write the correct answers on the board for Ps to copy down their notebooks. Call some Pairs to read the read the questions and answer Pairs work aloud Key: 1. thirty 2. family 3. drinking. 4. orange juice 5. seven 3. Read and match. Tell Ps that they are going to read the questions on the left The whole class and answers on the right by drawing a line between them. Check understanding. Give Ps a few seconds to read the text in silence. Check comprehension. Group works Give Ps time to do the task. Go around offer help, if necessary. Get Ps to swap and check their answers before checking Pairs work as class. Do choral and individual repetition Key: 1. e 2. c 3. d 4. b 5. a 4. Look and write. Tell Ps that they are going to look at the pictures and read The whole class the sentences then find out the suitable words to fill in the gaps. Give Ps a few seconds to read the text in silence. Check comprehension and give feedback T-The whole class Get Ps time to do the task. Go around offer help, if necessary. Pairs work Get Ps to swap and check their answers before checking as a class. Write the correct answers on the board for Ps to The whole class copy down their notebooks. Call some Ps to read the text and sentences aloud Pairs work Key: 1. seven thirty 2. factory worker 3. Children’s Day 4. orange juice 5. Write about your father or mother. Tell Ps that they are going to complete the paragraph about their mother or father. Give Ps a few seconds to Read then write about read the paragraph. Call a few Ps and elicit the words to their father or mother fill in the gaps. Give Ps time to do the task. Go around offer help, if necessary. Individually Get Ps to swap and check their answers before checking Nguyễn Thị Thanh Hương. 1.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(162)</span> Tiểu học Tiên Cát 2015 - 2016 Pairs work Individually. as class. Call a few Ps to read their sentences aloud 4. Consolidation - Consolidate the content of the lesson 5. Homework - Do exercises in the workbook. Review modal sentences and vocabulary from unit 11 to unit 15. ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Week 26 Preparing: 20/2/2016 Teaching: .....................2016. Period 104: Short story: Cat and mouse 3 I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: - Help students to review all the structure from unit 11 to unit 15 - Review the words, do exercises in the book 2. Skills: - Develop Ss listening, reading, writing skills, do exercises in book 3. Language focus: - Sentence Partners: from unit 1 to unit 5 - Vocabulary: : from unit 1 to unit 5 II. Teaching methods: - Communicative approach. Techniques:+ Ask and answer (say individually) + Work in pairs/ groups. + Discuss. III. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. VI. Teaching processes: 1. Class organization: - Greeting - Checking for the students' attendance. 2. Oral test: - Check pupils: check Sts' asking and answering questions about whether someone can do something 3. New lesson Teacher’s activities Ps’ activities Warm up: Sing a song The whole class 1. Read and listen to the story. Then fill in the gaps Tell Ps that they are going to read and listen to the story The whole class cat and mouse, then fill in the gaps. Give a few seconds for Ps to look at the pictures. (What are Miu, Chit and T- WC Mary doing in these pictures? Who is Mary thinking of? What day is it today?) Check comprehension and give feedback. Play the recording three times for Ps to fill in the blank The whole class Nguyễn Thị Thanh Hương. 1.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(163)</span> Tiểu học Tiên Cát 2015 - 2016 1. works 2. plays 3. taller 4. do 5. beach 2. Number the sentence. Tell Ps that they are going to put the sentences in the correct order and write the number in the box. Give Ps a few seconds to read the sentences in silence. Get Ps time Groups works to do the task. Ask them to try ordering the sentences without looking at the story. Go around offer help, if necessary. Get Ps to swap and check their answers before checking as a class. Call some Pairs to role play the dialogue. Pairs works Key: 1,6,3,2,8,7,4,5 3. Work in pairs. Complete the conversation with the information about you . Tell Ps that they are going to read the questions and write The whole class the answer. Give them time to read the questions and check comprehension. Give Ps time to practice in pairs. Go around offer help, if Pairs work necessary. Ask Ps to read aloud the dialogue 4. Find the words in the story to complete the sentences. Tell Ps that they are going to reads the sentences and find The whole class the words in the story to complete them. Get Ps time to do the task. Go around offer help, if necessary. Individually Get Ps to swap and check their answers before checking as a class. Write the correct answers on the board for Ps to Individually copy down their notebooks. Call some Ps to read the words aloud Key: 1. cook 2. beach 3. taller 4. musician 4. Consolidation - Consolidate the content of the lesson 5. Homework - Do exercises in the workbook. Review modal sentences and vocabulary from unit 11 to unit 15. Prepare for Unit 16 ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------. Nguyễn Thị Thanh Hương. 1.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(164)</span> Tiểu học Tiên Cát 2015 - 2016. Week 27 Preparing: 01/03/2016 Teaching: ................./03/2016 Period 105 REVIEW 3 I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: - Help students to review all the structure from unit 11 to unit 15 - Review the words, do exercises in the book 2. Skills: - Develop Ss listening, reading, writing skills, do exercises in book 3. Language focus: - Sentence Partners: from unit 11 to unit 15 - Vocabulary: from unit 11 to unit 15 II. Teaching methods: - Communicative approach. Techniques: + Ask and answer (say individually) + Work in pairs/ groups. + Discuss. III. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. VI. Teaching processes: 1. Class organization: - Greeting - Checking for the students' attendance. 2. Oral test: - Check pupils: check Sts' asking and answering questions about whether someone can do something 3. New lesson Teacher’s activities Ps’ activities Warm up: Sing good morning song The whole class Ex1. Order the words 1. time/have/does/breakfast/Mai/what? 2. has/6.30/she/at/breakfast. 3. does/father/do/your?//worker/he’s/a. Individually 5. like/would/some/you/lemonade?// thanks/no,/. 6. bigger/who’s/?/Nam/Phong/or/,// 7. bigger/Nam/than Phong/is. 8. Children’s/when/Day/is?// on/it/1st/is/June. Ex2. Fill one suitable word into the blank. 1. What________is it? - _____ is 8 o’clock. Pair works 2. Where_______your mother work?-_______a factory. 3. ________your favourite drink? - Coffee. 4. What _______do you like? - Fried chicken. 5. What does he ______like? - He’s ______. 6. What do you do _____Christmas?- I go to the _______. Nguyễn Thị Thanh Hương 1.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(165)</span> Tiểu học Tiên Cát 2015 - 2016 Ex3. Odd one out 1. book good noon look 2. school moon food foot 3. field view piece movie Group works 4. bear teach read meat 5. sea tea beef ready 6. cook too zoo noon 7. this than that weather 8. thin thick bath they 9. pool cool door room 10. learn week beach weak 4. Consolidation - Consolidate the content of the lesson 5. Homework - Do exercises in the workbook. Review modal sentences and vocabulary from unit 11 to unit 15. Prepare for Unit 16. ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Week 27 Preparing: 01/03/2016 Teaching: ................./03/2016 Unit 16: Let’s go to the bookshop. Period 106 Lesson 1 part 1+2 I. Aims 1. Knowledge: By the end of this unit Ps can: make and respond to the suggestions to go somewhere, use the words and phrases related to the topic The neigbourhood. 2. Skills: - Practice speaking, listening skills, do exercises in the book 3. Language - Sentence Partners: Let’s go to the......? - Great Idea/ Sorry, I’m busy. - Vocabulary: bakery, buy some bread, pharmacy, medicine, supermarket, sweet shop, chocolate, some, bookshop. II. Teaching methods: - Communicative approach. Techniques: + Ask and answer (say individually) + Work in pairs/ groups. + Discuss. III. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. VI. Teaching processes: 1. Class organization: - Greeting - Checking for the students' attendance. 2. Oral test: - Check pupils: write the new words and modal sentence 3. New lesson Teacher’s activities Ps’ activities Nguyễn Thị Thanh Hương. 1.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(166)</span> Tiểu học Tiên Cát 2015 - 2016 Warm up ask Ps to read the chant What do you do at Tet? The whole class 1. Look, listen and repeat. Give a few minutes for Ps to look at the four pictures and T-WC story. Tell Ps that they are going to make and respond to the suggestions to go somewhere. Ask them to look at the pictures to identify the context in which language is used. Ask questions such as Who are they? Where are they? What are The whole class they going? What are they talking about? Play the recording for Ps to listen and say along. Do choral and individual repeat T- WC Have Ps to find out the new structure. Whole class repeats it for several times 2. Point and say. New words: bakery buy some bread pharmacy= Chemist’s The whole class medicine=tablet supermarket sweet shop chocolate bookshop Let’s = Let us Modal sentence: Let’s go to the......? - Great Idea/ Sorry, I’m busy. T-WC Put the question and answer on the board and have Ps repeat them a few times. Point to the first picture and model the task with one P, using T-WC the expressions in the bubbles and the phrases under the picture. Ask Ps to say the sentences chorally and individually. Repeat the same procedure with the rest of the pictures. T-WC Ask Ps to work in pairs, using the prompts in the bubbles and the pictures. Select some pairs to role-play the dialogue in Work in pairs front of the class. ( Note: Uncountable nouns) Work in pairs. Suggest some places to go and say why. Tell Ps that they are going to practice making and respond to the suggestions to go somewhere. Have Ps work in pairs. Go The whole class around, offer help and correct the pronunciation, if necessary. Call a few pairs to act out the suggestions in front of the class. Work in pairs 4. Consolidation - Consolidate the content of the lesson 5. Home link - Do exercises in the workbook. Learn by heart the new words and structure. Prepare the next lesson. ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------. Nguyễn Thị Thanh Hương. 1.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(167)</span> Tiểu học Tiên Cát 2015 - 2016. Week 27 Preparing: 01/03/2016 Teaching: ................./03/2016 Unit 16: Let’s go to the bookshop. Period 107 Lesson 1 part 3+4+5 I. Aims 1. Knowledge: By the end of this unit Ps can: make and respond to the suggestions to go somewhere, use the words and phrases related to the topic The neigbourhood 2. Skills: - Practice writing, listening skills, do exercises in the book 3. Language - Sentence Partners: Let’s go to the......? - Great Idea/ Sorry, I’m busy. - Vocabulary: vegetables, drinks, cinema=movie theatre, see a film. II. Teaching methods: - Communicative approach. Techniques:+ Ask and answer (say individually) + Work in pairs/ groups. + Discuss. III. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. VI. Teaching processes: 1. Class organization: - Greeting - Checking for the students' attendance. 2. Oral test: - Check pupils: write the new words and modal sentence 3. New lesson Teacher’s activities Ps’ activities Warm up Play Bing go game Individually 3. Listen and tick. Tell Ps that they are going to listen to two dialogues and tick T-WC the correct pictures. Have them look at the pictures to identify the food and drink. check understanding (some vegetables, The whole class some drinks) Play the recording three times for Ps to listen, do the task and T- WC check their answers. Get Ps to swap and check their answers before checking as The whole class class. Key: 1. b 2a 3.a 4. b 4. Look and write. Tell Ps that they are going to complete the sentences, using the T-WC picture cues. Give them a few seconds to look at the pictures and think about the appreciate places and suitable reasons to complete Individual Nguyễn Thị Thanh Hương. 1.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(168)</span> Tiểu học Tiên Cát 2015 - 2016 the sentences. Check comprehension. Set a time limit for Ps to do. Go around, offer help, if necessary. Get Ps to swap and check their answers before checking as a T-WC class. Write the correct answers on the board for Ps to copy down their notebooks. Key: 1. to the bakery/ buy some cakes/bread 2. to the sweet shop/ buy some sweets. 3. to the pharmacy/ buy some medicine 6. Let’s sing. Tell Ps that they are going to sing the Let’s go song. Read each line and check comprehension. Sing each line and T-WC have Ps repeat it. When Ps are familiar with the tune, ask them to sing and do the actions. Ask groups of Ps to sit face to face and practice singing and Groups work doing the actions. Call a group of five to sing the song and do the actions. Groups work Have the whole sing the song and do the actions. 4. Consolidation - Consolidate the content of the lesson 5. Home link - Do exercises in the work book. Prepare the next lesson. --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Week 27 Preparing: 01/03/2016 Teaching: ................./03/2016 Unit 16: Let’s go to the bookshop. Period 108 Lesson 2 part 1+2+3 I. Aims 1. Knowledge: - By the end of this unit Ps can: ask and give reasons for going somewhere, use the words and phrases related to the topic The neigbourhood 2. Skills: - Practice speaking, listening skills, do exercises in the book 3. Language - Sentence Partners: Why do you want to go to the .....? - Because I want to..... - Vocabulary: cinema= movie theatre, see a movie, swimming pool, something, hungry, thirsty, tired II. Teaching methods: - Communicative approach. Techniques: + Ask and answer (say individually) + Work in pairs/ groups. + Discuss. III. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. VI. Teaching processes: 1. Class organization: - Greeting Nguyễn Thị Thanh Hương. 1.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(169)</span> Tiểu học Tiên Cát 2015 - 2016 - Checking for the students' attendance. 2. Oral test: - Check pupils: write the new words and modal sentence 3. New lesson Teacher’s activities Ps’ activities Warm up: Sing Let’s go... song Whole class 1. Look, listen and repeat. Tell Ps that they are going to learn to ask and give a reason. T-WC Give them a few second to look at the pictures and read the text before playing the recording to Ps to repeat. Check their The whole class comprehension by asking: Who's the boy/girl? Where are they? What are they doing? Check comprehension. Play the recording, Ps listen and repeat the text a few times. T- WC Play the recording for Ps to listen and say along. Have Ps to find out the new structure. Whole class repeats it The whole class for several times. And find out the new words and the new structure 2. Point and say. Vocabulary: cinema= movie theatre see a movie swimming pool, The whole class something hungry thirsty tired Sentence Partners: Why do you want to go to the .....? - Because I want to...... Tell Ps that they are going to practice asking and giving T-WC reasons for going somewhere. Ask Ps to look at the four pictures to teach the new words. Have Ps to look at the bubbles to understand how to offer someone food or drink and accepting/ declining someone’s offer. Point to the first picture T-WC and model the task with one P, using the sentences in the bubbles and the new words under the picture. Get Ps to work Pairs work in pairs, using the prompts in the bubbles and the pictures. Select some pairs to demonstrate the task in front of the class. Pairs work 3. Let’s talk Tell Ps that they are going to revise what they have learnt in The whole class Lesson 1 and Lesson 2. Have Ps work in pairs: make a suggestion to go somewhere and ask ask, give reasons for Pairs work going somewhere, Let’s go to the...., Why do you want.....? Why do you want to....? Call on a few pairs to act out the dialogue in front of the whole Pairs work class. Correct the pronunciation if necessary. 4. Consolidation - Consolidate the content of the lesson 5. Homework - Do exercises in the workbook. Learn by heart the new words and structure. Prepare the next lesson. -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Nguyễn Thị Thanh Hương. 1.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(170)</span> Tiểu học Tiên Cát 2015 - 2016. Week 28 Preparing: 11/03/2016 Teaching: ................./03/2016 Unit 16: Let’s go to the bookshop. Period 109 Lesson 2 Part 4+5+6 I. Aims 1. Knowledge: - By the end of this unit Ps can: ask and give reasons for going somewhere, use the words and phrases related to the topic The neigbourhood 2. Skills: - Practice writing, listening skills, do exercises in the book 3. Language - Sentence Partners: Why do you want to go to the .....? - Because I want to..... - Vocabulary: cinema= movie theatre, see a movie, swimming pool, something, hungry, thirsty, tired II. Teaching methods: - Communicative approach. Techniques: + Ask and answer (say individually) + Work in pairs/ groups. + Discuss. III. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. VI. Teaching processes: 1. Class organization: - Greeting - Checking for the students' attendance. 2. Oral test: - Check pupils: write the new words and modal sentence 3. New lesson Teacher’s activities Ps’ activities Warm up Talk about why they want to go somewhere Pairs work 4. Listen and number Tell the class that they are going to listen to four dialogues and T-WC circle the correct words. Have Ps to read each of the incomplete sentences and guess the word to fill the gaps. The whole class Check comprehension. Play the recording for Ps circle the words, ask them to focus on where the characters want to go and what they want to buy. T- WC Play the recording again for Ps to check their answer. Get Ps to swap and check their answers before checking as class. Key 1. a 2. c 3. b 4. c 5. Look and write. Tell Ps that they are going to look at the pictures and write the The whole class answer for the question, using the pictures cues. Have them to Nguyễn Thị Thanh Hương. 1.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(171)</span> Tiểu học Tiên Cát 2015 - 2016 look at the two worked example. Then ask them to look at the pictures and identify the places they want to go. Check understanding. Set a time limit for Ps to do the task Groups work independently. Go around and offer help, if necessary Get them to swap their answers before checking as a class. Call some Ps to write the answers Key: 1. she wants to buy some pens and books 2. they wants to play football and badminton. 6. Let’s play - Tell Ps that they are going to play game: Where and why? To practice suggesting places to go and giving the reasons. T-WC Prepare pieces of paper with names of places and put them into a box. Divide the class into groups of three. Ask two groups to go to the front of the class. Group 1 should draw a slip of paper from the box and say: Let’s go to the ....Group 2 asks Group work Why do you want to go the...? Group 1 answers - Because I want to ..... After that, the two groups swaps roles. Then invite another two groups of Ps to the front and continue. 4. Consolidation - Consolidate the content of the lesson 5. Home link - Do exercises in the workbook. Learn by heart the new words and structure. Prepare the next lesson. ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Week 28 Preparing: 11/03/2016 Teaching: ................./03/2016 Unit 16: Let’s go to the bookshop. Period 110 Lesson 3 part 1+2+3 I. Aims 1. Knowledge: - By the end of this unit Ps can: ask and give reasons for going somewhere, make and respond to the suggestions to go somewhere. use the words and phrases related to the topic The neigbourhood, understand what a syllable is abd how to divide words into syllables 2. Skills: - Practice speaking, listening skills, do exercises in the book 3. Language - Sentence Partners: - Vocabulary: II. Teaching methods: - Communicative approach. Techniques: + Ask and answer (say individually) + Work in pairs/ groups. + Discuss. III. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. Nguyễn Thị Thanh Hương. 1.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(172)</span> Tiểu học Tiên Cát 2015 - 2016 VI. Teaching processes: 1. Class organization: - Greeting - Checking for the students' attendance. 2. Oral test: - Check pupils: write the new words and modal sentence 3. New lesson Teacher’s activities Warm up Play game : Where and why 1 .Listen and repeat. Tell Ps that they are going to practice saying the words with one, two, three syllables (book, bookshop, bakery, supermarket) First explain to Ps what a syllable is ( A syllable is a word or part of word that contains only one vowel sound. For Ps at this level, you may focus on the vowel letters: a,e,i,o,u and for some words also y). Then put the four target words on the board, using vertical line to divide the syllables. Play the recording and ask Ps to repeat the words a few times. Ask Ps to clap at each syllable they say the words. Prompt Ps to say the words and sentences, paying attention to the target words and syllables. Do chorally repetition of the words and sentences unit Ps feel confident. Get some Ps to say the sentences in front of the class. Put more words on the board, indicating the syllables with the vertical lines. Ask Ps to repeat the words. 2. Listen , circle and write. Then say aloud. Tell Ps that they are going to listen to four sentences and circle the correct words. Give them a few seconds to read the words in silence. Play the recording so they can listen and tick the words. Play the recording again for Ps to check their answer Get Ps to swap and check their answers before checking as class. Ask Ps to read the sentences aloud. Go around and offer help, if necessary Key: 1. a 2. b 3. a 4. b 3. Let’s chant. Tell Ps that they are going to say the Why do you want to....? chant. Say the chant and check comprehension. Have Ps repeat every line of the chant. When they are familiar with the rhythm, show them how to say the chant and do the actions. Divide the class into three groups to say the chant. Get groups of Ps to sit face to face and practice chanting and doing the actions. Get around and offer help, if necessary. Call two groups to the front of the class to chant and do the actions. The rest class claps along the rhythm. 4 .Consolidation - Consolidate the content of the lesson Nguyễn Thị Thanh Hương. 1. Ps’ activities Pairs work T-WC The whole class. T- WC The whole class. The whole class Invidually The whole class. T-WC The whole class Groups work.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(173)</span> Tiểu học Tiên Cát 2015 - 2016 5. Homework - Do exercises in the workbook. Learn by heart the new words and structure. Prepare the next lesson. ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Week 28 Preparing: 11/03/2016 Teaching: ................./03/2016 Unit 16: Let’s go to the bookshop. Period 111 Lesson 3 part 4+5+6 I. Aims 1. Knowledge: - By the end of this unit Ps can: ask and give reasons for going somewhere, make and respond to the suggestions to go somewhere. use the words and phrases related to the topic The neigbourhood 2. Skills: - Practice reading, writing skills, do exercises in the book 3. Language - Sentence Partners: - Vocabulary: First, then , after that, finally, second, third II. Teaching methods: - Communicative approach. Techniques: + Ask and answer (say individually) + Work in pairs/ groups. + Discuss. III. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. VI. Teaching processes: 1. Class organization: - Greeting - Checking for the students' attendance. 2. Oral test: - Check pupils: write the new words and modal sentence 3. New lesson Teacher’s activities Ps’ activities Warm up ask Ps to read the chant Would you like some fish? The whole class 4. Read and number. Tell Ps that they are going to read the text and number the The whole class pictures. Have them to look at the pictures and describes them. After that, have them read the text and put the pictures in the correct order. Teach them some new words: First, then , after Groups work that, finally, second, third. Give Ps time to do the task. Go around, offer help, if necessary. Get Ps to swap and check their answers before checking as T_ WC class. Key: 1. d 2. c 3. a 4. b 5. Look and write Tell Ps that they are going to write sentences about where the The whole class characters want to go and why they want to go there. Have them work in pairs to discuss what they are going to write in Pairs work the blank. Set the time limit for them to do the task. When time Nguyễn Thị Thanh Hương. 1.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(174)</span> Tiểu học Tiên Cát 2015 - 2016 is up, get Ps to swap and correct their writing. Give Ps time to do the task. Go around, offer help, if Individually necessary. Get Ps to swap and check their writings before checking as class. Call a few Ps to read their writings aloud. Key: 2. swimming pool, he wants to swim 3. pharmacy, she wants to buy some medicine 4. cinema, they want to see a film 6. Project. Tell Ps that they are going to interview their classmates about T-WC where they want to go on Sunday and why want to go there. Give each of them a card. Ask them to copy the table from the Pairs work P’s book onto the cards. Give Ps time to interview three classmates. They should ask the interviewees where they want to go on Sunday and why they want to go there, Using Where Groups work do you want to go? Why do you want to go there? And complete the table. When Ps finish interviewing, ask them to report to the class. Individuals work 4. Consolidation - Consolidate the content of the lesson 5. Homework - Do exercises in the workbook. Learn by heart the new words and structure. Prepare the next lesson. -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Week 28 Preparing: 11/03/2016 Teaching: ................./03/2016 Unit 17: How much is the T-shirt? Period 112 Lesson 1 part 1+2 I. Aims 1. Knowledge: - By the end of unit, Ps can: use the words and phrases related to the topic Prices of clothes, ask and answer the questions about prices of clothes: singular 2. Skills: - Practice speaking, listening skills, do exercises in the book 3. Language - Sentence Partners: How much is the.....?- It’s......... - Vocabulary: scarf, blouse, jacket , skirt, jumper, T-shirt II. Teaching methods: - Communicative approach. Techniques: + Ask and answer (say individually) + Work in pairs/ groups. + Discuss. III. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. VI. Teaching processes: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Hương. 1.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(175)</span> Tiểu học Tiên Cát 2015 - 2016 1. Class organization: - Greeting - Checking for the students' attendance. 2. Oral test: - Check pupils: write the new words and modal sentence 3. New lesson Teacher’s activities Ps’ activities Warm up ask Ps to read the chant Why do you go to ....? The whole class 1. Look, listen and repeat. Give a few minutes for Ps to look at the four pictures and T-WC story. Tell Ps that they are going to ask and answer the questions about prices of clothes: singular. Ask them to look at the pictures to identify the context in which language is used. The whole class Ask questions such as Who are they? Where are they? What is Mai/ Quan wearing? How much is the T-shirt?(Mai wants to T- WC buy a T-shirt and she asks for the price) Play the recording for Ps to listen and say along. Do choral and The whole class individual repeat Have Ps to find out the new structure. Whole class repeats it for several times 2. Point and say. New words: scarf blouse jacket skirt jumper T-shirt T-WC Modal sentence: How much is the.....?- It’s......... Put the question and answer on the board and have Ps repeat them a few times. Point to the first picture and model the task with one P, using the expressions in the bubbles and the phrases under the T-WC picture. Ask Ps to say the sentences chorally and individually. Repeat the same procedure with the rest of the pictures. Ask Ps to work in pairs, using the prompts in the bubbles and Work in pairs the pictures. Select some pairs to role-play the dialogue in front of the class. Work in pairs. Ask your partners about the prices of the clothes. Tell Ps that they are going to practice asking and answering The whole class about the prices of clothes above How much is the T-shirt?It’s.... Have Ps work in pairs. Go around, offer help and correct the Work in pairs pronunciation, if necessary. Call a few pairs to act out the dialogue in front of the class. 4. Consolidation - Consolidate the content of the lesson 5. Home link - Do exercises in the workbook. Learn by heart the new words and structure. Prepare the next lesson. -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Nguyễn Thị Thanh Hương. 1.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(176)</span> Tiểu học Tiên Cát 2015 - 2016. Week 29 Preparing: 14/03/2016 Teaching: ................./2016 Unit 17: How much is the T-shirt? Period 113 Lesson 1 part 3+4+5 I. Aims 1. Knowledge: - By the end of unit, Ps can: use the words and phrases related to the topic Prices of clothes, ask and answer the questions about prices of clothes: singular 2. Skills: - Practice writing, listening skills, do exercises in the book 3. Language - Sentence Partners: How much is the.....?- It’s......... - Vocabulary: scarf, blouse, jacket, skirt, jumper, T-shirt II. Teaching methods: - Communicative approach. Techniques: + Ask and answer (say individually) + Work in pairs/ groups. + Discuss. III. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. VI. Teaching processes: 1. Class organization: - Greeting - Checking for the students' attendance. 2. Oral test: - Check pupils: write the new words and modal sentence 3. New lesson Teacher’s activities Ps’ activities Warm up Play game Slap the board about the words related to Groups work the clothes 3. Listen and tick. Tell Ps that they are going to listen to three dialogues about the T-WC price of clothes. Have them look at the pictures to identify the clothes and the prices of them. check understanding Play the recording three times for Ps to listen, do the task and Individually check their answers. Get Ps to swap and check their answers before checking as The whole class class. Key: 1. b 2.c 3.a 4. Look and write. Tell Ps that they are going to look at the clothes and write the T-WC price of each item. Give them a few seconds to look at the pictures and ask them to identify the names of the clothing items and their prices. Nguyễn Thị Thanh Hương. 1.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(177)</span> Tiểu học Tiên Cát 2015 - 2016 Remind them to mention the colour of each item. Set a time Pairs work limit for Ps to do. Go around, offer help, if necessary. Get Ps to swap and check their answers before checking as a T-WC class. Write the correct answers on the board for Ps to copy down their notebooks. Call some Ps to read complete sentences aloud Key: 1. yellow jumper, forty thousand dong 2. red jacket, sixty thousand dong 3. green skirt, seventy thousand dong. 4. purple/pink blouse , fifty thousand dong 6. Let’s play - Tell Ps that they are going to play game: Pelmanism T-WC Prepare some cards with images of clothing items and the matching words for the items. Put Ps in groups of six. Give each group a set of cards. Each group should distribute the cards on the table, face down. A P turns over a pair of cards. If the cards show an image and a word that match with each Groups work other (Imagine T-shirt and the words T- shirt), the Ps takes the cards and continues to turn over another pair of cards. If the cards do not match, they would be turned the face down again and the next P should have a go. The P with the most cards at Groups work the end of the game is the winner. 4. Consolidation - Consolidate the content of the lesson 5. Home link - Do exercises in the work book. Prepare the next lesson. --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Week 29 Preparing: 14/03/2016 Teaching: ................./2016 Unit 17: How much is the T-shirt? Period 114 Lesson 2 part 1+2+3 I. Aims 1. Knowledge: - By the end of unit, Ps can: use the words and phrases related to the topic Prices of clothes, ask and answer the questions about prices of clothes (plural) 2. Skills: - Practice speaking, listening skills, do exercises in the book 3. Language - Sentence Partners: How much are the.....? - They are..... - Vocabulary: Jeans, shoes, trousers, sandals, sales assistant, salesgirl II. Teaching methods: - Communicative approach. Techniques: + Ask and answer (say individually) + Work in pairs/ groups. + Discuss. III. Teaching aids: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Hương. 1.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(178)</span> Tiểu học Tiên Cát 2015 - 2016 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. VI. Teaching processes: 1. Class organization: - Greeting - Checking for the students' attendance. 2. Oral test: - Check pupils: write the new words and modal sentence 3. New lesson Teacher’s activities Ps’ activities Warm up: Ask and answer the price of clothes Pairs work 1. Look, listen and repeat. Tell Ps that they are going to read a story. Give them a few T-WC second to look at the pictures and read the text before playing the recording to Ps to repeat. Check their comprehension by The whole class asking: Who are they? Where are they? What does Mai want to buy? What does she ask? How much is it? Check comprehension. Play the recording, Ps listen and repeat the text a few times. Play the recording for Ps to listen and say along. The whole class Have Ps to find out the new structure. Whole class repeats it for several times. And find out the new words and the new The whole class structure 2. Point and say. - Vocabulary: jeans shoes trousers sandals sales assistant, T-WC salesgirl Sentence Partners: How much are the.....? - They are...... Tell Ps that they are going to practice asking and answering the questions about prices of clothes. Ask Ps to look at the four T-WC pictures to teach the new words. Have Ps to look at the bubbles to understand how to offer someone food or drink and Pairs work accepting/ declining someone’s offer. Point to the first picture and model the task with one P, using the sentences in the Pairs work bubbles and the new words under the picture. Get Ps to work in pairs, using the prompts in the bubbles and the pictures. The whole class Select some pairs to demonstrate the task in front of the class. 3. Let’s talk Tell Ps that they are going to revise what they have learnt in Pairs work Lesson 1 and Lesson 2. Have Ps work in pairs: ask and answer the questions How much is the....? -It’s..... How much are the .....?- They are..... Call on a few pairs to act out the dialogue in front of the whole Pairs work class. Correct the pronunciation if necessary. 4. Consolidation - Consolidate the content of the lesson 5. Homework Nguyễn Thị Thanh Hương. 1.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(179)</span> Tiểu học Tiên Cát 2015 - 2016 - Do exercises in the workbook. Learn by heart the new words and structure. Prepare the next lesson. -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Week 29 Preparing: 14/03/2016 Teaching: ................./2016 Unit 17: How much is the T-shirt? Period 115 Lesson 2 part 4+5+6 I. Aims 1. Knowledge: - By the end of unit, Ps can: us the words and phrases related to the topic Prices of clothes, ask and answer the questions about prices of clothes plural 2. Skills: - Practice writing, listening skills, do exercises in the book 3. Language - Sentence Partners: How much are the.....? - They are..... - Vocabulary: Jeans, shoes, trousers, sandals, sales assistant, salesgirl II. Teaching methods: - Communicative approach. Techniques: + Ask and answer (say individually) + Work in pairs/ groups. + Discuss. III. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. VI. Teaching processes: 1. Class organization: - Greeting - Checking for the students' attendance. 2. Oral test: - Check pupils: write the new words and modal sentence 3. New lesson Teacher’s activities Ps’ activities. Nguyễn Thị Thanh Hương. 1.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(180)</span> Tiểu học Tiên Cát 2015 - 2016 Warm up ask S some questions about daily routines pairs words 4. Listen and number Introduce the activity and give a few seconds for Ps to look at T-WC the pictures. Check comprehension by eliciting Ps’ answers to questions such as: What clothes can you see? Play the The whole class recording for Ps number the pictures ask them to focus on the prices of the items. Play the recording again for Ps to check their answer. Get Ps to swap and check their answers before checking as T- WC class. Key 1. 90.000 dong 2. 73.000 dong 3. 80.000 dong 4. 95. 000 dong 5. Look and write. Tell Ps that they are going to complete the sentences, using the The whole class pictures cues. Have them to look at the worked examples. Then ask them to look at the pictures and write the words for the clothes and the prices of them. Check understanding. Set a time limit for Ps to do the task independently. Go around and Individually offer help, if necessary Get them to swap their answers before checking as a class. Call some Ps to write the answers Key: 1. brown the sandals, seventy-two thousand dong 2. The pair of blue Jeans is eighty eight thousand dong 3. The pair of black and white shoes is eighty thousand dong 6. Let’s sing. T-WC Tell Ps that they are going to sing the Buying clothes song. Read each line and check comprehension. Sing each line and have Ps repeat it. When Ps are familiar with the tune, ask them to sing and do the actions. Group work Ask groups of Ps to sit face to face and practice singing and doing the actions. Call a group of five to sing the song and do the actions. Group work Have the whole sing the song and do the actions. 4. Consolidation - Consolidate the content of the lesson 5. Home link - Do exercises in the workbook. Learn by heart the new words and structure. Prepare the next lesson. ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Week 29 Preparing: 14/03/2016 Teaching: ................./2016 Unit 17: How much is the T-shirt? Period 116 Lesson 3 part 1+2+3 Nguyễn Thị Thanh Hương. 1.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(181)</span> Tiểu học Tiên Cát 2015 - 2016 I. Aims 1. Knowledge: - By the end of unit, Ps can: us the words and phrases related to the topic Prices of clothes, ask and answer the questions about prices of clothes (singular/ plural), pronounce two syllables words with the stress on the first syllable 2. Skills: - Practice speaking, listening skills, do exercises in the book 3. Language - Sentence Partners: - Vocabulary: II. Teaching methods: - Communicative approach. Techniques: + Ask and answer (say individually) + Work in pairs/ groups. + Discuss. III. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. VI. Teaching processes: 1. Class organization: - Greeting - Checking for the students' attendance. 2. Oral test: - Check pupils: write the new words and modal sentence 3. New lesson Teacher’s activities Ps’ activities Warm up sing the Buying clothes song The whole class 1 .Listen and repeat. Tell Ps that they are going to pronounce the following some T-WC words sandals, trousers, jumper, jacket. Explain to Ps what word stress is (Word stress is the emphasis that you put on a The whole class syllable by saying it more loudly. We use the stress mark to indicate word stress) Write the words with the stress mark on the board and say them a few times. Play the recording and ask T- WC Ps to repeat a few times, using louder voice for the first syllables. Prompt Ps to say the words and sentences, paying attention to the target phonics letters. Do chorally repetition of The whole class the words and sentences unit Ps feel confident. Get some Ps to say the sentences in front of the class. 2. Look at the sentences and stress marks(‘). Then listen and say the sentences aloud. Tell Ps that they are going to look at the sentences, listen to the The whole class recording and repeat the sentences. Play the recording so they can listen and repeat after focus the underlined words and clap at the stressed syllable. Ask Sts to read the sentences, T correct Individually Ps’ pronunciation if necessary 3. Let’s chant. Tell Ps that they are going to say the How much is/are...? chant. Say the chant and check comprehension. Have Ps repeat T-WC every line of the chant. When they are familiar with the Nguyễn Thị Thanh Hương. 1.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(182)</span> Tiểu học Tiên Cát 2015 - 2016 rhythm, show them how to say the chant and do the actions. Divide the class into three groups to say the chant. The whole class Get groups of Ps to sit face to face and practice chanting and doing the actions. Get around and offer help, if necessary. Call two groups to the front of the class to chant and do the Groups work actions. The rest class claps along the rhythm. 4 .Consolidation - Consolidate the content of the lesson 5. Homework - Do exercises in the workbook. Learn by heart the new words and structure. Prepare the next lesson. ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------. Week 30 Preparing: 20/03/2016 Teaching: ................./2016 Unit 17: How much is the T-shirt? Period 117 Lesson 3 part 4+5+6 I. Aims 1. Knowledge: - By the end of unit, Ps can: us the words and phrases related to the topic Prices of clothes, ask and answer the questions about prices of clothes (singular/ plural), pronounce two syllables words with the stress on the first syllable 2. Skills: - Practice reading, writing skills, do exercises in the book 3. Language - Sentence Partners: - Vocabulary: II. Teaching methods: - Communicative approach. Techniques: + Ask and answer (say individually) + Work in pairs/ groups. + Discuss. III. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. VI. Teaching processes: 1. Class organization: - Greeting - Checking for the students' attendance. 2. Oral test: - Check pupils: write the new words and modal sentence 3. New lesson Nguyễn Thị Thanh Hương. 1.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(183)</span> Tiểu học Tiên Cát 2015 - 2016 Teacher’s activities Ps’ activities Warm up ask Ps to read the chant How much is/are...? The whole 4. Read and complete. class Tell Ps that they are going to read the text and complete the table. The whole Have them to read the information to fill in the table. Tell them to class focus on what clothes Mai wears on hot days and cold days. Give Ps time to do the task. Go around, offer help, if necessary. Get Ps to swap and check their answers before checking as class. Groups work Key: At school At home on hot a blouse, a short skirt, a a blouse, a pair of shorts days red scarf and a pair of and a pair of slippers sandals on cold a jacket over a jumper, a a jumper, a pair of days long skirt, a red scarf, a trousers, a pair of socks pair of socks and shoes and slippers 5. Draw three clothing items and write their prices T-WC Tell Ps that they are going to draw a few sketches of clothes on the board as examples. Set the time limit for them to do the task. When time is up, get Ps to swap and correct their writing. Individually Give Ps time to do the task. Go around, offer help, if necessary. Get Ps to swap and check their writings before checking as class. Call a few Ps to read their writings aloud 6. Project. T-WC Tell Ps that they are going to make four flashcards of clothes. Give each P four cards, and also some crayons and colour pencils for drawing. They should draw a clothing item on the side of each card and write the word for it on the other side. Then they should Individuals work show the flashcards to the class and talk about them. Check understanding. Ask some Ps to present their in the class 4. Consolidation - Consolidate the content of the lesson 5. Homework - Do exercises in the workbook. Learn by heart the new words and structure. Prepare the next lesson. -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Week 30 Preparing: 20/03/2016 Teaching: ................./2016 Unit 18: What’s your phone number? Period 118 Lesson 1 part 1+2 I. Aims. Nguyễn Thị Thanh Hương. 1.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(184)</span> Tiểu học Tiên Cát 2015 - 2016 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the unit, Ps can: Use the words and phrases related the topics Phone numbers and Outdoor activities, ask and answer questions about phone numbers. 2. Skills: - Practice speaking, listening skills, do exercises in the book 3. Language - Sentence Partners: What’s your phone number?- It’s............... - Vocabulary: a mobile phone, phone, phone number II. Teaching methods: - Communicative approach. Techniques: + Ask and answer (say individually) + Work in pairs/ groups. + Discuss. III. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. VI. Teaching processes: 1. Class organization: - Greeting - Checking for the students' attendance. 2. Oral test: - Check pupils: write the new words and modal sentence 3. New lesson Teacher’s activities Ps’ activities Warm up ask Ps to read the chant How much is/are...? The whole class 1. Look, listen and repeat. Give a few minutes for Ps to look at the four pictures and T-WC story. Tell Ps that they are going to ask and answer questions about phone numbers. Ask them to look at the pictures to identify the context in which language is used. Ask questions The whole class such as Who are they? Where are they? What are they talking? What’s your phone number?- It’s..........Play the recording for T- WC Ps to listen and say along. Do choral and individual repeat Have Ps to find out the new structure. Whole class repeats it The whole class for several times 2. Point and say. New words: a mobile phone phone phone number T-WC Modal sentence: What’s your phone number?- It’s............... Put the question and answer on the board and have Ps repeat them a few times. Point to the first picture and model the task with one P, using the expressions in the bubbles and the phrases under the T-WC picture. Ask Ps to say the sentences chorally and individually. Repeat the same procedure with the rest of the pictures. T-WC Ask Ps to work in pairs, using the prompts in the bubbles and the pictures. Select some pairs to role-play the dialogue in Work in pairs front of the class. Work in pairs. Ask your partners about their telephone Nguyễn Thị Thanh Hương. 1.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(185)</span> Tiểu học Tiên Cát 2015 - 2016 number Tell Ps that they are going to practice asking and answering about their telephone numbers using What’s your phone The whole class number?- It’s...............Have Ps work in pairs. Go around, offer help and correct the pronunciation, if necessary. Call a few pairs to act out the dialogue in front of the class. Work in pairs 4. Consolidation - Consolidate the content of the lesson 5. Home link - Do exercises in the workbook. Learn by heart the new words and structure. Prepare the next lesson. -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Week 30 Preparing: 20/03/2016 Teaching: ................./2016 Unit 18: What’s your phone number? Period 119 Lesson 1 part 3+4+5 I. Aims 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the unit, Ps can: Use the words and phrases related the topics Phone numbers and Outdoor activities, ask and answer questions about phone numbers. 2. Skills: - Practice writing, listening skills, do exercises in the book 3. Language - Sentence Partners: What’s your phone number?- It’s............... - Vocabulary: a mobile phone, phone, phone number II. Teaching methods: - Communicative approach. Techniques:+ Ask and answer (say individually) + Work in pairs/ groups. + Discuss. III. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. VI. Teaching processes: 1. Class organization: - Greeting - Checking for the students' attendance. 2. Oral test: - Check pupils: write the new words and modal sentence 3. New lesson Teacher’s activities Ps’ activities Warm up Ask and answer about someone’s phone number Pair work 3. Listen and tick. Tell Ps that they are going to listen to three dialogues about T-WC phone numbers and tick the correct pictures. Have them look at the pictures to identify the picture shows one phone number. The whole class Ps say in English. check understanding Nguyễn Thị Thanh Hương 1.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(186)</span> Tiểu học Tiên Cát 2015 - 2016 Play the recording three times for Ps to listen, do the task and T- WC check their answers. Get Ps to swap and check their answers before checking as The whole class class. Key: 1. b 2.c 3.a 4. Look and write. Tell Ps that they are going to write and say the phone numbers T-WC in English in the pictures. Give them a few seconds to look at the pictures and write the answers. Set a time limit for Ps to do. Go around, offer help, if necessary. Pairs work Get Ps to swap and check their answers before checking as a class. Write the correct answers on the board for Ps to copy down their notebooks. T-WC Call some Ps to read complete sentences aloud Key: 2. It’s oh-nine-eight-six oh-nine-seven oh-nine-nine 3. It’s oh-nine-one-two two-eight-three eight-oh-four 6. Let’s sing. Tell Ps that they are going to sing the What’s your phone number? song. T-WC Read each line and check comprehension. Sing each line and have Ps repeat it. When Ps are familiar with the tune, ask them to sing and do the actions. Ask groups of Ps to sit face to face and practice singing and Groups work doing the actions. Call a group of five to sing the song and do the actions. Have the whole sing the song and do the actions. Groups work 4. Consolidation - Consolidate the content of the lesson 5. Home link - Do exercises in the work book. Prepare the next lesson. --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Week 30 Preparing: 20/03/2016 Teaching: ................./2016 Unit 18: What’s your phone number? Period 120 Lesson 2 part 1+2+3 I. Aims 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the unit, Ps can: Use the words and phrases related the topics Phone numbers and Outdoor activities, accept and decline the invitation. 2. Skills: - Practice speaking, listening skills, do exercises in the book 3. Language - Sentence Partners: Would you like to.....? - I’d love to/ Sorry, I can’t - Vocabulary: go for a walk=walk=have a walk, go for a picnic, go fishing, go skating Nguyễn Thị Thanh Hương. 1.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(187)</span> Tiểu học Tiên Cát 2015 - 2016 II. Teaching methods: - Communicative approach. Techniques: + Ask and answer (say individually) + Work in pairs/ groups. + Discuss. III. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. VI. Teaching processes: 1. Class organization: - Greeting - Checking for the students' attendance. 2. Oral test: - Check pupils: write the new words and modal sentence 3. New lesson Teacher’s activities Warm up: Sing What’s your phone number ?song 1. Look, listen and repeat. Tell Ps that they are going to read a story in which the characters accept and decline an invitation using: Would you like to.....? - I’d love to/ Sorry, I can’t. Give them a few second to look at the pictures and read the text before playing the recording to Ps to repeat. Check their comprehension by asking: Who's the boy/girl? Where are they? What are they talking? Check comprehension. Play the recording, Ps listen and repeat the text a few times. Play the recording for Ps to listen and say along. Have Ps to find out the new structure. Whole class repeats it for several times. And find out the new words and the new structure 2. Point and say. - Vocabulary: go for a walk=walk=have a walk go fishing go for a picnic= have a picnic go skating Sentence Partners: Would you like to.....? - I’d love to/ Sorry, I can’t Tell Ps that they are going to practice offering someone food or drink and accepting/ declining someone’s invitation. Ask Ps to look at the four pictures to teach the new words. Have Ps to look at the bubbles to understand how to accept/ decline someone’s invitation. Point to the first picture and model the task with one P, using the sentences in the bubbles and the new words under the picture. Get Ps to work in pairs, using the prompts in the bubbles and the pictures. Select some pairs to demonstrate the task in front of the class. 3. Let’s talk Tell Ps that they are going to revise what they have learnt in Lesson 1 and Lesson 2. Have Ps work in pairs: ask and answer Nguyễn Thị Thanh Hương. 1. Ps’ activities Whole class T-WC The whole class T- WC The whole class The whole class. T-WC. T-WC Pairs work. Pairs work The whole class Pairs work.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(188)</span> Tiểu học Tiên Cát 2015 - 2016 the questions What is your telephone number? It’s.... and Would you like to.....? - I’d love to/ Sorry, I can’t. and how to respond to them. Call on a few pairs to act out the dialogue in front of the whole Pairs work class. Correct the pronunciation if necessary. 4. Consolidation - Consolidate the content of the lesson 5. Homework - Do exercises in the workbook. Learn by heart the new words and structure. Prepare the next lesson. ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------. Week 31 Preparing: 01/04/2016 Teaching: ................./2016 Unit 18: What’s your phone number? Period 121 Lesson 2 part 4+5+6 I. Aims 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the unit, Ps can: Use the words and phrases related the topics Phone numbers and Outdoor activities, accept and decline the invitation, 2. Skills: - Practice writing, listening skills, do exercises in the book 3. Language - Sentence Partners: Would you like to.....? - I’d love to/ Sorry, I can’t - Vocabulary: go for a walk=walk=have a walk, go for a picnic, go fishing, go skating II. Teaching methods: - Communicative approach. Techniques: + Ask and answer (say individually) + Work in pairs/ groups. + Discuss. III. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. VI. Teaching processes: 1. Class organization: - Greeting - Checking for the students' attendance. Nguyễn Thị Thanh Hương. 1.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(189)</span> Tiểu học Tiên Cát 2015 - 2016 2. Oral test: - Check pupils: write the new words and modal sentence 3. New lesson Teacher’s activities Ps’ activities Warm up Practice accepting and declining the invitation Pair work 4. Listen and circle tell Ps that they are going to listen to four dialogues and circle T-WC the correct words or phone numbers to complete the sentences. Give Ps a few seconds to read the incomplete sentences in The whole class silence and guess the answers to fill in the gapsPlay the recording for Ps number the pictures ask them to focus on the jobs of the people. Play the recording again for Ps to check T- WC their answer. Get Ps to swap and check their answers before checking as class. Key 1. a 2. b 3. a 4. b 5. Look and write. Tell Ps that they are going to write questions, using the The whole class pictures cues and the given answers. Have them to read the given answers and incomplete questions. Then ask them to look at the pictures and guess the words to complete the questions. Check understanding. Set a time limit for Ps to do Groups work the task independently. Go around and offer help, if necessary Get them to swap their answers before checking as a class. Call some Ps to write the answers Key: 1. to go swimming 3. your phone number 2. Would you like to go for a picnic 4. May I speak to 6. Let’s play - Tell Ps that they are going to play game: Find the phone numbers Prepare 30 small pieces of paper. On each of them, write a number from 0 to 9 so that there are in total three instances of T-WC each number. Put the pieces of paper in a box. Ask two pairs of Ps to come out and stand next to the box. Say a phone number. The pair that is quicker to find the correct numbers from the box and put them in the correct order to get a point Group work and continues to play the game with another pair. The pair that gets the most points at the end of the game is the winner. 4. Consolidation - Consolidate the content of the lesson 5. Home link - Do exercises in the workbook. Learn by heart the new words and structure. Prepare the next lesson. ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Week 31 Preparing: 01/04/2016 Nguyễn Thị Thanh Hương. 1.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(190)</span> Tiểu học Tiên Cát 2015 - 2016 Teaching: ................./2016 Unit 18: What’s your phone number? Period 122 Lesson 3 part 1+2+3 I. Aims 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the unit, Ps can: Use the words and phrases related the topics Phone numbers and Outdoor activities, ask and answer questions about phone numbers, accept and decline the invitation, pronounce two syllables words with the stress on the second syllables 2. Skills: - Practice speaking, listening skills, do exercises in the book 3. Language - Sentence Partners: - Vocabulary: invite you to the party, invite, enjoy having party, enjoy sitting in the sun, enjoy being by the sea II. Teaching methods: - Communicative approach. Techniques: + Ask and answer (say individually) + Work in pairs/ groups. + Discuss. III. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. VI. Teaching processes: 1. Class organization: - Greeting - Checking for the students' attendance. 2. Oral test: - Check pupils: write the new words and modal sentence 3. New lesson Teacher’s activities Ps’ activities Warm up Practice accepting and declining the invitation Pairs work 1 .Listen and repeat. Tell Ps that they are going to pronounce the following some words repeat, enjoy, invite, complete. Explain to Ps what word T-WC stress is (Word stress is the emphasis that you put on a syllable by saying it more loudly. We use the stress mark to indicate The whole class word stress) Write the words with the stress mark on the board and say them a few times. Play the recording and ask Ps to repeat a few times, using louder voice for the second syllables. T- WC Prompt Ps to say the words and sentences, paying attention to the target phonics letters. Do chorally repetition of the words The whole class and sentences unit Ps feel confident. Get some Ps to say the sentences in front of the class 2. Listen and circle. Then say the sentences aloud. Tell Ps that they are going to listen to two sentences and circle the correct words. Give them a few seconds to read the The whole class sentences and the words in silence. Play the recording so they can listen and circle the words. Play the recording again for Ps The whole class to check their answer Nguyễn Thị Thanh Hương. 1.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(191)</span> Tiểu học Tiên Cát 2015 - 2016 Get Ps to swap and check their answers before checking as class. Ask Ps to read the sentences aloud Key: 1. a 2. b 3. b 4. a 3. Let’s chant. Tell Ps that they are going to say the I’d like to invite you to my party. chant. Say the chant and check comprehension. Have T-WC Ps repeat every line of the chant. When they are familiar with the rhythm, show them how to say the chant and do the actions. Divide the class into three groups to say the chant. The whole class Get groups of Ps to sit face to face and practice chanting and doing the actions. Get around and offer help, if necessary. Call two groups to the front of the class to chant and do the Groups work actions. The rest class claps along the rhythm. 4 .Consolidation - Consolidate the content of the lesson 5. Homework - Do exercises in the workbook. Learn by heart the new words and structure. Prepare the next lesson. ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Week 31 Preparing: 01/04/2016 Teaching: ................./2016 Unit 18: What’s your phone number? Period 123 Lesson 3 part 4+5+6 I. Aims 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the unit, Ps can: Use the words and phrases related the topics Phone numbers and Outdoor activities, ask and answer questions about phone numbers, accept and decline and invitation, pronounce two syllables words with the stress on the second syllables 2. Skills: - Practice reading, writing skills, do exercises in the book 3. Language - Sentence Partners: - Vocabulary: enjoy the scenery II. Teaching methods: - Communicative approach. Techniques: + Ask and answer (say individually) + Work in pairs/ groups. + Discuss. III. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. VI. Teaching processes: 1. Class organization: - Greeting - Checking for the students' attendance. Nguyễn Thị Thanh Hương. 1.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(192)</span> Tiểu học Tiên Cát 2015 - 2016 2. Oral test: - Check pupils: write the new words and modal sentence 3. New lesson Teacher’s activities Ps’ activities Warm up ask Ps to read the chant I’d like to invite you to my The whole class party. 4. Read and tick Tell Ps that they are going to read the text about Tom’s picnic The whole class with his family, decide the statements are true or false and tick the correct answer. Give Ps time to do the task. Go around, offer help, if necessary. Get Ps to swap and check their answers before checking as Groups work class. Key: 1. F 2. T 3. F 4T 5. T 5. Let’s write Tell Ps that they are going to write a short paragraph about themselves. Have them to work in pairs to discuss what they are going to write in the blank. Set the time limit for them to Pairs work do the task. When time is up, get Ps to swap and correct their writing. Give Ps time to do the task. Go around, offer help, if Individually necessary. Get Ps to swap and check their writings before checking as class. Call a few Ps to read their writings aloud 6. Project. Tell Ps that they are going to ask four classmates for their T-WC phone numbers, and then report the results to the class. Give each P a card and ask them to copy the table from the P’s Pairs work book on their cards. Give Ps time to ask their classmates for their phone numbers and write them down. Have Ps look at the table and tell the class their classmates’ Groups work phone numbers. EX; Good morning, class. In my phone book, there are four numbers. Thang’s phone number is......Trang’s phone number Individuals work is.... Thank you for your listening. 4. Consolidation - Consolidate the content of the lesson 5. Homework - Do exercises in the workbook. Learn by heart the new words and structure. Prepare the next lesson. -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Week 31 Preparing: 01/04/2016 Teaching: ................./2016 Unit 19: What animals do you want to see? Nguyễn Thị Thanh Hương. 1.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(193)</span> Tiểu học Tiên Cát 2015 - 2016 Period 124 Lesson 1 part 1+2 I. Aims 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the unit, Ps can: Use the words and phrases related the topics Zoo animals, ask and answer questions about some one’s desire 2. Skills: - Practice speaking, listening skills, do exercises in the book 3. Language - Sentence Partners: What animals do you want to see? - I want to see..... - Vocabulary: kangaroos, monkeys, crocodiles, tigers, elephants II. Teaching methods: - Communicative approach. Techniques: + Ask and answer (say individually) + Work in pairs/ groups. + Discuss. III. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. VI. Teaching processes: 1. Class organization: - Greeting - Checking for the students' attendance. 2. Oral test: - Check pupils: write the new words and modal sentence 3. New lesson Teacher’s activities Ps’ activities Warm up ask Ps to read the chant I’d like to invite you to my The whole class party. 1. Look, listen and repeat. Give a few minutes for Ps to look at the four pictures and T-WC story. Tell Ps that they are going to ask and answer questions about Mai and Nam’s visiting the zoo. Ask them to look at the pictures to identify the context in which language is used. Ask The whole class questions such as Who are they? Where are they? What are they doing? What animals do you want to see?- I want to T- WC see..... Play the recording for Ps to listen and say along. Do choral and The whole class individual repeat Have Ps to find out the new structure. Whole class repeats it for several times 2. Point and say. New words: kangaroos monkeys crocodiles tigers elephants T-WC Modal sentence: What animals do you want to see? - I want to see..... Put the question and answer on the board and have Ps repeat them a few times. Point to the first picture and model the task with one P, using T-WC the expressions in the bubbles and the phrases under the picture. Ask Ps to say the sentences chorally and individually. T-WC Nguyễn Thị Thanh Hương. 1.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(194)</span> Tiểu học Tiên Cát 2015 - 2016 Repeat the same procedure with the rest of the pictures. Ask Ps to work in pairs, using the prompts in the bubbles and Work in pairs the pictures. Select some pairs to role-play the dialogue in front of the class. Work in pairs. Ask your partners about what animal they want to see at the zoo. Tell Ps that they are going to practice asking and answering The whole class about their food and drink using What animals do you want to see?- I want to see.....Have Ps work in pairs. Go around, offer help and correct the pronunciation, if necessary(pandas, hippos). Call a few pairs to act out the dialogue in front of the class. Work in pairs 4. Consolidation - Consolidate the content of the lesson 5. Home link - Do exercises in the workbook. Learn by heart the new words and structure. Prepare the next lesson. ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------. Week 32 Preparing: 10/04/2016 Teaching: ................./2016 Unit 19: What animals do you want to see? Period 125 Lesson 1 part 3+4+5 I. Aims 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the unit, Ps can: Use the words and phrases related the topics Zoo animals, ask and answer questions about some one’s desire 2. Skills: - Practice writing, listening skills, do exercises in the book 3. Language - Sentence Partners: What animals do you want to see? - I want to see..... - Vocabulary: kangaroos, monkeys, crocodiles, tigers, elephants II. Teaching methods: - Communicative approach. Techniques:+ Ask and answer (say individually) + Work in pairs/ groups. + Discuss. III. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. VI. Teaching processes: 1. Class organization: - Greeting - Checking for the students' attendance. 2. Oral test: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Hương. 1.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(195)</span> Tiểu học Tiên Cát 2015 - 2016 - Check pupils: write the new words and modal sentence 3. New lesson Teacher’s activities Ps’ activities Warm up Ask and answer about what animals they want to Pair work see 3. Listen and match. Tell Ps that they are going to listen to three dialogues about T-WC what animals Tom, Tony and Linda want to see and match each character to the correct pictures. Have them look at the The whole class pictures to identify the zoo animals. Check understanding Play the recording three times for Ps to listen, do the task and T- WC check their answers. Get Ps to swap and check their answers before checking as The whole class class. Key: 1. c 2.a 3.b 4. Look and write. Tell Ps that they are going to write what children want to see using pictures cues. T-WC Give them a few seconds to look at the pictures to identify what animal the children want to see in each picture. Ask them to read questions draw the attention to the different pronouns: he, she, they. After that, have them write the answer Pairs work incomplete sentences Set a time limit for Ps to do. Go around, offer help, if necessary. Get Ps to swap and check their answers before checking as a T-WC class. Write the correct answers on the board for Ps to copy down their notebooks. Call some Ps to read complete sentences aloud Key: 1. He wants to see crocodiles 2. She wants to see monkeys 3. They want to see kangaroos 4. They want to see tigers 6. Let’s play - Tell Ps that they are going to play game: Charades Show a P the name of a zoo animal. That P must act out the T-WC animal for the rest of the class to guess. The quickest P to say the name of animal gets point. Then select another P to mine Groups work another animal. The P who gets the most points at the end of the game is the winner. Groups work 4. Consolidation - Consolidate the content of the lesson 5. Home link - Do exercises in the work book. Prepare the next lesson. --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Week 32 Nguyễn Thị Thanh Hương. 1.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(196)</span> Tiểu học Tiên Cát 2015 - 2016 Preparing: 10/04/2016 Teaching: ................./2016 Unit 19: What animals do you want to see? Period 126 Lesson 2 part 1+2+3 I. Aims 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the unit, Ps can: Use the words and phrases related the topics Zoo animals, express reasons 2. Skills: - Practice speaking, listening skills, do exercises in the book 3. Language - Sentence Partners: I like.....because...../ I don’t like........because........ - Vocabulary: scary, funny, fast, violence, because, why, wonderful II. Teaching methods: - Communicative approach. Techniques: + Ask and answer (say individually) + Work in pairs/ groups. + Discuss. III. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. VI. Teaching processes: 1. Class organization: - Greeting - Checking for the students' attendance. 2. Oral test: - Check pupils: write the new words and modal sentence 3. New lesson Teacher’s activities Ps’ activities Warm up: play game: Charades Whole class 1. Look, listen and repeat. Tell Ps that they are going to read a conversation in which the T-WC Linda and Nam ask and answer questions about the zoo animals using I like.....because...../I don’t The whole class like........because......... . Give them a few second to look at the pictures and read the text before playing the recording to Ps to repeat. Check their comprehension by asking: Who's the T- WC boy/girl? Where are they? What are they doing? Check comprehension. Play the recording, Ps listen and repeat the text a few times. The whole class Play the recording for Ps to listen and say along. Have Ps to find out the new structure. Whole class repeats it The whole class for several times. And find out the new words and the new structure 2. Point and say. Vocabulary: T-WC scary funny fast violence because why wonderful= excellent Sentence Partners: I like.....because...../ I don’t like........because......... T-WC Nguyễn Thị Thanh Hương. 1.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(197)</span> Tiểu học Tiên Cát 2015 - 2016 Tell Ps that they are going to practice expressing reasons why they like/ do not like some animals. Ask Ps to look at the four Pairs work pictures to teach the new words. Have Ps to look at the bubbles to understand how to express reasons why they like/ do not like some animals. Point to the first picture and model the task with one P, using the sentences in the bubbles and the new words under the picture. Get Ps to work in pairs, using the Pairs work prompts in the bubbles and the pictures. Select some pairs to demonstrate the task in front of the class. The whole class 3. Let’s talk Tell Ps that they are going to revise what they have learnt in Lesson 1 and Lesson 2. Have Ps work in pairs: ask and answer Pairs work the questions What animals do you want to see?- I want to see.....and I like.....because...../I don’t like........because......... and how to respond to them. Call on a few pairs to act out the dialogue in front of the whole Pairs work class. Correct the pronunciation if necessary. 4. Consolidation - Consolidate the content of the lesson 5. Homework - Do exercises in the workbook. Learn by heart the new words and structure. Prepare the next lesson. -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Week 32 Preparing: 10/04/2016 Teaching: ................./2016 Unit 19: What animals do you want to see? Period 127 Lesson 2 part 4+5+6 I. Aims 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the unit, Ps can: Use the words and phrases related the topics Zoo animals, express reasons. 2. Skills: - Practice writing, listening skills, do exercises in the book 3. Language - Sentence Partners: I like.....because...../ I don’t like........because........ - Vocabulary: scary, funny, fast, violence, because, why, wonderful II. Teaching methods: - Communicative approach. Techniques: + Ask and answer (say individually) + Work in pairs/ groups. + Discuss. III. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. VI. Teaching processes: 1. Class organization: - Greeting - Checking for the students' attendance. Nguyễn Thị Thanh Hương. 1.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(198)</span> Tiểu học Tiên Cát 2015 - 2016 2. Oral test: - Check pupils: write the new words and modal sentence 3. New lesson Teacher’s activities Ps’ activities Warm up Play game Bing go Individual 4. Listen and write Tell Ps that they are going to listen to four dialogues and complete the sentences about Linda, Mai, Nam and Peter. Ask T-WC Ps Top read the four incomplete sentences and guess the possible reasons. Play the recording for Ps number the pictures The whole class ask them to focus on the jobs of the people. Play the recording again for Ps to check their answer. Get Ps to swap and check their answers before checking as T- WC class. Key 1. big 2. fast 3. funny 4. scary 5. Look and write. Tell Ps that they are going to complete the sentences about animals, using the pictures cues. Have them to look at the The whole class pictures to identify the zoo animals and possible adjectives to express the reasons. Then ask them to read the sentences and complete them. Check understanding. Set a time limit for Ps to do the task independently. Go around and offer help, if Groups work necessary Get them to swap their answers before checking as a class. Call some Ps to write the answers Key: 1. zebras, they are beautiful 3. bears, they are big 2. crocodiles, they are scary 4. kangaroos, they are fast 6. Let’s sing. Tell Ps that they are going to sing the Why or Why not? song. Read each line and check comprehension. Sing each line and T-WC have Ps repeat it. When Ps are familiar with the tune, ask them to sing and do the actions. Ask groups of Ps to sit face to face and practice singing and doing the actions. Group work Call a group of five to sing the song and do the actions. Have the whole sing the song and do the actions. 4. Consolidation - Consolidate the content of the lesson 5. Home link - Do exercises in the workbook. Learn by heart the new words and structure. Prepare the next lesson. ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Week 32 Preparing: 10/04/2016 Teaching: ................./2016 Nguyễn Thị Thanh Hương. 1.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(199)</span> Tiểu học Tiên Cát 2015 - 2016 Unit 19: What animals do you want to see? Period 128 Lesson 3 part 1+2+3 I. Aims 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the unit, Ps can: Use the words and phrases related the topics Zoo animals, ask and answer questions about some one’s desire, express reasons, pronounce three syllables words with the stress on the first syllable. 2. Skills: - Practice speaking, listening skills, do exercises in the book 3. Language - Sentence Partners: - Vocabulary: II. Teaching methods: - Communicative approach. Techniques: + Ask and answer (say individually) + Work in pairs/ groups. + Discuss. III. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. VI. Teaching processes: 1. Class organization: - Greeting - Checking for the students' attendance. 2. Oral test: - Check pupils: write the new words and modal sentence 3. New lesson Teacher’s activities Ps’ activities Warm up Sing the song Why or Why not? The whole class 1 .Listen and repeat. Tell Ps that they are going to pronounce the following some words crocodile, elephant, wonderful, beautiful. Explain to Ps T-WC what word stress is (Word stress is the emphasis that you put on a syllable by saying it more loudly. We use the stress mark The whole class to indicate word stress) Write the words with the stress mark on the board and say them a few times. Play the recording and ask Ps to repeat a few times, using louder voice for the first T- WC syllables. Prompt Ps to say the words and sentences, paying attention to the target phonics letters. Do chorally repetition of The whole class the words and sentences unit Ps feel confident. Get some Ps to say the sentences in front of the class. 2. Listen and circle. Then say the sentences aloud. Tell Ps that they are going to listen to four sentences and circle The whole class the correct words. Give them a few seconds to read the words and the sentences in silence and guess the words to fill in the gaps. Play the recording so they can listen and circle the The whole class answers. Play the recording again for Ps to check their answer Get Ps to swap and check their answers before checking as class. Ask Ps to read the sentences aloud Nguyễn Thị Thanh Hương. 1.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(200)</span> Tiểu học Tiên Cát 2015 - 2016 Key: 1. b 2. b 3. a 4. b 3. Let’s chant. Tell Ps that they are going to say the I want to go to the zoo chant. Say the chant and check comprehension. Have Ps repeat T-WC every line of the chant. When they are familiar with the rhythm, show them how to say the chant and do the actions. Divide the class into three groups to say the chant. The whole class Get groups of Ps to sit face to face and practice chanting and doing the actions. Get around and offer help, if necessary. Call two groups to the front of the class to chant and do the Groups work actions. The rest class claps along the rhythm. 4 .Consolidation - Consolidate the content of the lesson 5. Homework - Do exercises in the workbook. Learn by heart the new words and structure. Prepare the next lesson. ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------. Week 33 Preparing: 20/04/2016 Teaching: ................./2016 Unit 19: What animals do you want to see? Period 129 Lesson 3 part 4+5+6 I. Aims 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the unit, Ps can: Use the words and phrases related the topics Zoo animals, ask and answer questions about some one’s desire, express reasons, pronounce three syllables words with the stress on the first syllable. 2. Skills: - Practice reading, writing skills, do exercises in the book 3. Language - Sentence Partners: - Vocabulary: II. Teaching methods: - Communicative approach. Techniques: + Ask and answer (say individually) + Work in pairs/ groups. + Discuss. III. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. VI. Teaching processes: 1. Class organization: - Greeting - Checking for the students' attendance. 2. Oral test: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Hương. 2.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(201)</span> Tiểu học Tiên Cát 2015 - 2016 - Check pupils: write the new words and modal sentence 3. New lesson Teacher’s activities Ps’ activities Warm up ask Ps to read the chant I want to go to the zoo The whole class 4. Read and complete. Tell Ps that they are going to read the email about Mai and The whole class Nam’s visit to the zoo and complete the paragraph. Explain the new words perhaps, dangerous. Have them to read the incomplete paragraph first then let them to read the email and Groups work focus on the information needed to fill in the blanks. (What can be found at the zoo, description of the animals, and the reasons for liking and disliking the animals). Give Ps time to T_ WC do the task. Go around, offer help, if necessary. Get Ps to swap and check their answers before checking as The whole class class. Call a pair to ask and answer question their favourite food and drink Key: 1. animals 2, beautiful/ friendly/scary 3. big/dangerous 4. monkeys 5. funny 5. Let’s write Tell Ps that they are going to write a short paragraph about Pairs work they want to go to the zoo, what animals they like or dislike, and the reason. Have them work in pairs to discuss what they are going to write. Set the time limit for them to do the task. Individually When time is up, get Ps to swap and correct their writing. Give Ps time to do the task. Go around, offer help, if necessary. Get Ps to swap and check their writings before checking as class. Call a few Ps to read their writings aloud 6. Project. Tell Ps that they are going to draw and color their favourite T-WC animal(s), and tell the class why they like them/it. Give them time to draw. Go around and help P if necessary. Ps Pairs work brainstorms possible sentences to describe their favourite animals. Call some Ps to the front of the class to talk about Individuals work their favourite animals 4. Consolidation - Consolidate the content of the lesson 5. Homework - Do exercises in the workbook. Learn by heart the new words and structure. Prepare the next lesson. -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Week 33 Preparing: 20/04/2016 Teaching: ................./2016 Nguyễn Thị Thanh Hương. 2.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(202)</span> Tiểu học Tiên Cát 2015 - 2016 Unit 20: What are you going to do this summer? Period 130 Lesson 1 part 1+2 I. Aims 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the unit, Ps can: Use the words and phrases related the topics Future plans, ask and answer questions about where someone plan to go 2. Skills: - Practice speaking, listening skills, do exercises in the book 3. Language - Sentence Partners: What are you going to do this summer?- I’m going to.... - Vocabulary: Ha Long Bay, Hue citadel, holiday=vacation, have a holiday, stay, delicious II. Teaching methods: - Communicative approach. Techniques: + Ask and answer (say individually) + Work in pairs/ groups. + Discuss. III. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. VI. Teaching processes: 1. Class organization: - Greeting - Checking for the students' attendance. 2. Oral test: - Check pupils: write the new words and modal sentence 3. New lesson Teacher’s activities Ps’ activities Warm up ask Ps to read the chant I want to go to the The whole class zooschool? 1. Look, listen and repeat. Give a few minutes for Ps to look at the four pictures and T-WC story. Tell Ps that they are going to ask and answer questions about where they plan to go. Ask them to look at the pictures to identify the context in which language is used. Ask questions such as Who are they? Where are they? What are The whole class they doing? What are they going to do this summer?- They are going to....Play the recording for Ps to listen and say along. Do T- WC choral and individual repeat Have Ps to find out the new structure. Whole class repeats it The whole class for several times 2. Point and say. New words: Ha Long Bay Hue citadel holiday=vacation, T-WC have a holiday stay delicious Modal sentence: What are you going to do this summer? - I’m going to.... Put the question and answer on the board and have Ps repeat T-WC them a few times. Point to the first picture and model the task with one P, using T-WC Nguyễn Thị Thanh Hương. 2.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(203)</span> Tiểu học Tiên Cát 2015 - 2016 the expressions in the bubbles and the phrases under the picture. Ask Ps to say the sentences chorally and individually. Repeat the same procedure with the rest of the pictures. Ask Ps to work in pairs, using the prompts in the bubbles and the pictures. Select some pairs to role-play the dialogue in Work in pairs front of the class. Work in pairs. Ask your partners about where they are going to this summer. Tell Ps that they are going to practice asking and answering about where they are going to this summer using What are you The whole class going to do this summer?- I’m going to....Have Ps work in pairs. Go around, offer help and correct the pronunciation, if Work in pairs necessary. Call a few pairs to act out the dialogue in front of the class. 4. Consolidation - Consolidate the content of the lesson 5. Home link - Do exercises in the workbook. Learn by heart the new words and structure. Prepare the next lesson. ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------. Week 33 Preparing: 20/04/2016 Teaching: ................./2016 Unit 20: What are you going to do this summer? Period 131 Lesson 1 part 3+4+5 I. Aims 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the unit, Ps can: Use the words and phrases related the topics Future plans, ask and answer questions about where someone plan to go 2. Skills: - Practice writing, listening skills, do exercises in the book 3. Language - Sentence Partners: What are you going to do this summer?- I’m going to.... - Vocabulary: Ha Long Bay, Hue citadel, holiday=vacation, have a holiday, stay, delicious II. Teaching methods: - Communicative approach. Techniques:+ Ask and answer (say individually) + Work in pairs/ groups. + Discuss. III. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. VI. Teaching processes: 1. Class organization: - Greeting - Checking for the students' attendance. Nguyễn Thị Thanh Hương. 2.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(204)</span> Tiểu học Tiên Cát 2015 - 2016 2. Oral test: - Check pupils: write the new words and modal sentence 3. New lesson Teacher’s activities Ps’ activities Warm up Ask and answer about someone’s future plan Pair work 3. Listen and tick. Tell Ps that they are going to listen to three dialogues about the T-WC places and the characters and tick the correct pictures. Have them look at the pictures to identify the places in Vietnam and The whole class say the names aloud. Play the recording three times for Ps to listen, do the task and T- WC check their answers. Get Ps to swap and check their answers before checking as The whole class class. Key: 1. c 2.a 3.b 4. Look and write. Tell Ps that they are going to write the answers to the questions about where they are going use suggested in the T-WC pictures. Give them a few seconds to look at the pictures and write the answers. Set a time limit for Ps to do. Go around, offer help, if necessary. Pairs work Get Ps to swap and check their answers before checking as a class. Write the correct answers on the board for Ps to copy down their notebooks. Call some Ps to read complete sentences aloud T-WC Key: 1. I’m going to Da Nang 2. He’s going to Hoi An 3. They’re going to Hue 6. Let’s sing. Tell Ps that they are going to sing the You’re happy in T-WC summer holidays song. Read each line and check comprehension. Sing each line and have Ps repeat it. When Ps are familiar with the tune, ask them to sing and do the actions. Ask groups of Ps to sit face to face and practice singing and Groups work doing the actions. Call a group of five to sing the song and do the actions. Groups work Have the whole sing the song and do the actions. 4. Consolidation - Consolidate the content of the lesson 5. Home link - Do exercises in the work book. Prepare the next lesson. --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Week 33 Preparing: 20/04/2016 Nguyễn Thị Thanh Hương. 2.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(205)</span> Tiểu học Tiên Cát 2015 - 2016 Teaching: ................./2016 Unit 20: What are you going to do this summer? Period 132 Lesson 2 part 1+2+3 I. Aims 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the unit, Ps can: Use the words and phrases related the topics Future plans, ask and answer questions about what someone plan to do. 2. Skills: - Practice speaking, listening skills, do exercises in the book 3. Language - Sentence Partners: What are you going to do?- I’m going to.... - Vocabulary: stay in a hotel, eat seafood, build sandal castle, go on a boat cruise, go swimming in the sea II. Teaching methods: - Communicative approach. Techniques: + Ask and answer (say individually) + Work in pairs/ groups. + Discuss. III. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. VI. Teaching processes: 1. Class organization: - Greeting - Checking for the students' attendance. 2. Oral test: - Check pupils: write the new words and modal sentence 3. New lesson Teacher’s activities Ps’ activities Warm up: Sing You’re happy in summer holidays song. Whole class 1. Look, listen and repeat. Tell Ps that they are going to read a story in which the T-WC characters ask and answer questions about the future plans. Give them a few second to look at the pictures and read the The whole class text to identify the context in which the language is used before playing the recording to Ps to repeat. Check their comprehension by asking: Who's the boy/girl? Where are T- WC they? What are they doing? Check comprehension. Play the recording, Ps listen and repeat the text a few times. The whole class Play the recording for Ps to listen and say along. Have Ps to find out the new structure. Whole class repeats it The whole class for several times. And find out the new words and the new structure 2. Point and say. Vocabulary: stay in a hotel eat seafood build sandal castle T-WC go on a boat cruise go swimming in the sea Sentence Partners: What are you going to do?- I’m going to..... Tell Ps that they are going to practice asking and answering T-WC what the Ps are going to do in the future. Ask Ps to look at the Nguyễn Thị Thanh Hương. 2.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(206)</span> Tiểu học Tiên Cát 2015 - 2016 four pictures to teach the new words. Have Ps to look at the The whole class bubbles to understand how to ask and answer what the Ps are going to do in the future. Point to the first picture and model the task with one P, using the sentences in the bubbles and the Pairs work new words under the picture. Get Ps to work in pairs, using the prompts in the bubbles and the pictures. Select some pairs to demonstrate the task in front of the class. Pairs work 3. Let’s talk Tell Ps that they are going to revise what they have learnt in Lesson 1 and Lesson 2. Have Ps work in pairs: ask and answer The whole class the questions about their own future plans: What are you going to do this summer?- I’m going to.... and how to respond to them. Call on a few pairs to act out the dialogue in front of the whole Pairs work class. Correct the pronunciation if necessary. 4. Consolidation - Consolidate the content of the lesson 5. Homework - Do exercises in the workbook. Learn by heart the new words and structure. Prepare the next lesson. -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Week 34 Preparing: 01/05/2016 Teaching: ................./2016 Unit 20: What are you going to do this summer? Period 133 Lesson 2 part 4+5+6 I. Aims 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the unit, Ps can: Use the words and phrases related the topics Future plans, ask and answer questions about what someone plan to do 2. Skills: - Practice writing, listening skills, do exercises in the book 3. Language - Sentence Partners: What are you going to do?- I’m going to.... - Vocabulary: stay in a hotel, eat seafood, build sandal castle, go on a boat cruise, go swimming in the sea II. Teaching methods: - Communicative approach. Techniques: + Ask and answer (say individually) + Work in pairs/ groups. + Discuss. III. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. VI. Teaching processes: 1. Class organization: - Greeting - Checking for the students' attendance. Nguyễn Thị Thanh Hương. 2.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(207)</span> Tiểu học Tiên Cát 2015 - 2016 2. Oral test: - Check pupils: write the new words and modal sentence 3. New lesson Teacher’s activities Warm up ask S some questions about what they are going to do 4. Listen, circle and write Tell Ps that they are going to listen to four dialogues about Phong and circle the correct pictures. Ask Ps to read the sentences to identify the possible words to fill the gaps. Then have them look at the pictures and guess what Phong is going to do in summer. Check comprehension. Play the recording for Ps number the pictures ask them to focus on the jobs of the people. Play the recording again for Ps to check their answer. Get Ps to swap and check their answers before checking as class. Key 1. a 2. b 3. a 4. a 5. Look and write. Tell Ps that they are going to write the answers to the question, using the pictures cues. Have them to look at the incomplete sentences and identify what the Ps are going to do. After that, have them to find appreciate phrases to complete the sentences. Check understanding. Set a time limit for Ps to do the task independently. Go around and offer help, if necessary Get them to swap their answers before checking as a class. Call some Ps to write the answers Key: 1. is going to Phu Quoc 3. are going to Sapa 2. is going to swimming in the sea 3. are going to Sapa 4. are going to play football 6. Let’s play - Tell Ps that they are going to play game: Say where Put a map of VietNam on the board and highlight some major cities/places. Divide the class into groups of four and ask three groups of Ps to stand in three lines facing the board. Ask Where are you going this summer vacation? The first group 1 answer We’re going to+Name of place. The first P other two groups have find the place on the map and point at it. The quicker P wins a point for the group. The groups take turns to answer the question and the Ps who have answered and pointed should go to the end of the queues. After all Ps have had a go, the group with the most points is the winner. Then ask another three groups to play the game. You may ask the winners to play a final. 4. Consolidation Nguyễn Thị Thanh Hương. 2. Ps’ activities Individual T-WC The whole class T- WC. The whole class. Groups work. T-WC. Group work. Group work.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(208)</span> Tiểu học Tiên Cát 2015 - 2016 - Consolidate the content of the lesson 5. Home link - Do exercises in the workbook. Learn by heart the new words and structure. Prepare the next lesson. ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Week 34 Preparing: 01/05/2016 Teaching: ................./2016 Unit 20: What are you going to do this summer? Period 134 Lesson 3 part 1+2+3 I. Aims 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the unit, Ps can: Use the words and phrases related the topics Future plans, ask and answer questions about where someone plan to go, ask and answer questions about what someone plan to do, pronounce three syllables words with the stress on the second syllable. 2. Skills: - Practice speaking, listening skills, do exercises in the book 3. Language - Sentence Partners: - Vocabulary: II. Teaching methods: - Communicative approach. Techniques: + Ask and answer (say individually) + Work in pairs/ groups. + Discuss. III. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. VI. Teaching processes: 1. Class organization: - Greeting - Checking for the students' attendance. 2. Oral test: - Check pupils: write the new words and modal sentence 3. New lesson Teacher’s activities Ps’ activities Warm up play game: Say where Pairs work 1 .Listen and repeat. Tell Ps that they are going to pronounce the following some T-WC words delicious, enormous, November, December. Explain to Ps what word stress is (Word stress is the emphasis that you The whole class put on a syllable by saying it more loudly. We use the stress mark to indicate word stress) Write the words with the stress mark on the board and say them a few times. Play the T- WC recording and ask Ps to repeat a few times, using louder voice for the second syllables. Prompt Ps to say the words and The whole class sentences, paying attention to the target phonics letters. Do chorally repetition of the words and sentences unit Ps feel Nguyễn Thị Thanh Hương. 2.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(209)</span> Tiểu học Tiên Cát 2015 - 2016 confident. Get some Ps to say the sentences in front of the class 2. Listen, circle and write. Then say aloud. Tell Ps that they are going to listen to four sentences and circle The whole class the correct words. Give them a few seconds to read the words and the sentences in silence and guess the word to fill the gap of each sentence. Play the recording so they can listen and tick The whole class the words. Play the recording again for Ps to check their answer Get Ps to swap and check their answers before checking as class. Ask Ps to read the sentences aloud Key: 1. b 2. b 3. a 4. a 3. Let’s chant. Tell Ps that they are going to say the Where are you going? T-WC chant. Say the chant and check comprehension. Have Ps repeat every line of the chant. When they are familiar with the rhythm, show them how to say the chant and do the actions. The whole class Divide the class into three groups to say the chant. Get groups of Ps to sit face to face and practice chanting and doing the actions. Get around and offer help, if necessary. Groups work Call two groups to the front of the class to chant and do the actions. The rest class claps along the rhythm. 4 .Consolidation - Consolidate the content of the lesson 5. Homework - Do exercises in the workbook. Learn by heart the new words and structure. Prepare the next lesson. ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Week 34 Preparing: 01/05/2016 Teaching: ................./2016 Unit 20: What are you going to do this summer? Period 135 Lesson 3 part 4+5+6 I. Aims 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the unit, Ps can: Use the words and phrases related the topics Future plans, ask and answer questions about where someone plan to go, ask and answer questions about what someone plan to do, pronounce three syllables words with the stress on the second syllable. 2. Skills: - Practice reading, writing skills, do exercises in the book 3. Language - Sentence Partners: - Vocabulary: II. Teaching methods: - Communicative approach. Techniques: + Ask and answer (say individually) Nguyễn Thị Thanh Hương. 2.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(210)</span> Tiểu học Tiên Cát 2015 - 2016 + Work in pairs/ groups. + Discuss. III. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. VI. Teaching processes: 1. Class organization: - Greeting - Checking for the students' attendance. 2. Oral test: - Check pupils: write the new words and modal sentence 3. New lesson Teacher’s activities Ps’ activities Warm up ask Ps to read the chant Where are you going? The whole class 4. Read and complete. Tell Ps that they are going to read the text about summer The whole class holidays and complete the sentences. Have them to read the incomplete sentences under the text and guess what words they need to fill the gaps. Tell them to focus on the future plans. Groups work Give Ps time to do the task. Go around, offer help, if necessary. Get Ps to swap and check their answers before checking as T_ WC class. Call a pair to ask and answer question their favourite food and The whole class drink Key: 1. Ha long bay 2. a nice hotel (by the sea) 3. swim 4. a boat cruise 5. (delicious) seafood 5. Write about the plan for your summer holiday Tell Ps that they are going to write a short paragraph about their plan for the summer holiday. Have them work in pairs or Pairs work groups to discuss what they are going to write in the blank. Set the time limit for them to do the task. When time is up, get Ps to swap and correct their writing. Individually Give Ps time to do the task. Go around, offer help, if necessary. Get Ps to swap and check their writings before checking as class. Call a few Ps to read their writings aloud 6. Project. Tell Ps that they are going to work in pairs and ask their T-WC partners about their holiday plans, using the questions. They should make notes and tell the class about their partners’ plans. Pairs work When Ps finish interviewing, ask them to report to the class. Ex: Good morning, class. I’d like to tell you about Linh’s plan for the summer holidays. She’s going to Ha long bay in Groups work summer. She’s going there with her family. She’s going to stay in a hotel. She’s going to swim at the beach and play volleyball with her sisters. Thanks for listening. Individuals work 4. Consolidation Nguyễn Thị Thanh Hương. 2.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(211)</span> Tiểu học Tiên Cát 2015 - 2016 - Consolidate the content of the lesson 5. Homework - Do exercises in the workbook. Learn by heart the new words and structure. Prepare the next lesson. -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Week 34 Preparing: 01/05/2016 Teaching: ................./2016 Period 136 Review 4 I. Aims 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson, Ps can: listen, read and identify specific information related to the theme: Me and the world around, read, listen, and understand the story, have a conversation with partners, using the script, complete a text, using the picture cues. 2. Skills: - Practice writing, listening, and reading skills 3. Language - Sentence Partners: - Vocabulary: II. Teaching methods: - Communicative approach. Techniques:+ Ask and answer (say individually) + Work in pairs/ groups. + Discuss. III. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. VI. Teaching processes: 1. Class organization: - Greeting - Checking for the students' attendance. 2. Oral test: - Check pupils: write the new words and modal sentence 3. New lesson Teacher’s activities Ps’ activities Warm up Where are you going? Pair work 1. Listen and tick. Tell Ps that they are going to listen to five dialogues about and T-WC tick the correct pictures. Have them look at the pictures to identify the similarities and difference among them. check The whole class understanding Play the recording three times for Ps to listen, do the task and T- WC check their answers. Get Ps to swap and check their answers before checking as The whole class class. Key: 1. b 2.a 3.c 4. a 5. c 2. Read and circle. Tell Ps that they are going to read the text and circle the Nguyễn Thị Thanh Hương. 2.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(212)</span> Tiểu học Tiên Cát 2015 - 2016 correct words to complete the sentences. Set the limit time for T-WC Ps to do the exercise. Check understanding Go around, offer help, if necessary. Get Ps to swap and check their answers before checking as a class. Call some Ps to read complete sentences aloud Pairs work Key: 1. a 2. c 3. a 4. c 3. Read and match. Tell Ps that they are going to read the questions to the left and pair them with the answers on the right by drawing a line between them. Check understanding. Set a time limit for Ps to do the task independently. Go around and offer help, if Individually necessary Get them to swap their answers before checking as a class. Call some Ps to write the answers Key: 1d 2. e 3a 4.b 5. c 4 Write the answers. Tell Ps that they are going to write the answers to the Groups work questions, using the pictures cues Look at the pictures. Set the limit time for Ps to do the exercise. Check understanding Go around, offer help, if necessary. Get Ps to swap and check their answers before checking as a Groups work class. Call some Ps to read complete sentences aloud Key: 1. It’s forty five thousand dong 2. They are ninety one thousand dong. 3. It’s 0912559786 4. They are going to play football on the beach 5. Look and write. Tell Ps that they are going to look at the pictures and complete T-WC the text Ask Ps to read the text and guess the possible words or phrases to complete the sentences. Ask Ps to look at the pictures and describe them. Check understanding. Set a time limit for Ps to Individually do the task independently. Go around and offer help, if necessary Get them to swap their answers before checking as a class. Call some Ps to write the answers Key: 1. friends 2. badminton 3. swimming 4. taking 5. lunch 4. Consolidation - Consolidate the content of the lesson 5. Home link - Do exercises in the work book. Prepare the next lesson. --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Week 35 Preparing: 10/05/2016 Nguyễn Thị Thanh Hương. 2.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(213)</span> Tiểu học Tiên Cát 2015 - 2016 Teaching: ................./2016 Period 137 Short story: Cat and mouse 4 I. Aims 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson, Ps can: review the words and structures from Unit 16 to unit 20 2. Skills: - Practice speaking, listening, and reading skills 3. Language - Sentence Partners: - Vocabulary: II. Teaching methods: - Communicative approach. Techniques: + Ask and answer (say individually) + Work in pairs/ groups. + Discuss. III. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. VI. Teaching processes: 1. Class organization: - Greeting - Checking for the students' attendance. 2. Oral test: - Check pupils: write the new words and modal sentence 3. New lesson Teacher’s activities Ps’ activities Warm up: Name the characters in the story: Cat and Mouse Whole class 1. Read, listen to the story. Then correct the words in red. Tell Ps that they are going to read and listen to the story, and T-WC correct the words in red. (Where? What animals? What they are doing in the shop?). Ask Ps to read the text and guess the words to replace the red words. Play the recording three times for Ps to listen, do the task and check their answers. Group works Get Ps to swap and check their answers before checking as class. Key: 1. tigers=>lions 2. quiet=>friendly 3. Where=>How 4. a doll=> a T-shirt 5. Sixty thousand=> seventy thousand 2. Work in pairs. Put the words in the correct order. Then practice the conversation. T- WC Tell Ps that they are going to put the words in the correct order and practice the conversation with a partner. Set the limit time The whole class for Ps to do the exercise. Check understanding Go around, offer help, if necessary. Group work Get Ps to swap and check their answers before checking as a class. Call some Ps to read complete sentences aloud Key: A: What animal do you want to see? B: I want to see tigers. Nguyễn Thị Thanh Hương. 2.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(214)</span> Tiểu học Tiên Cát 2015 - 2016 A: Why do you want to see them? B: Because they’re scary. A: They aren’t scary. They are friendly. 3. Correct the wrong sentences. Pairs work Tell Ps that they are going to read the sentences and see if they are right or wrong and then correct the wrong ones. Check understanding. Set a time limit for Ps to do the task The whole class independently. Go around and offer help, if necessary Get them to swap their answers before checking as a class. Call some Ps to write the answers Key: 1. Correct 4. Correct 2. Marry likes elephants because they are friendly. 3 The elephant in the zoo can speak 5. They say goodbye to the elephant 4 Unscramble the words from the story. Tell Ps that they are going to put the letters in the correct order Individually to make words, and they can find the words in the story. Set the limit time for Ps to do the exercise. Check understanding Go around, offer help, if necessary. Get Ps to swap and check their answers before checking as a class. Key: 1. friendly 2. elephant 3. animals 4. really 5. goodbye 6. lions 4. Consolidation - Consolidate the content of the lesson 5. Homework - Do exercises in the workbook. Learn by heart the new words and structure. Prepare the next lesson. -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Week 35 Preparing: 10/05/2016 Teaching: ................./2016 Period 138 Review I. Aims 1. Knowledge: - Offering someone food or drink and accepting/ declining someone’s offer 2. Skills: - Practice writing, listening skills, do exercises in the book 3. Language - Sentence Partners: from Unit 16 to Unit 20 - Vocabulary: from Unit 16 to Unit 20 II. Teaching methods: - Communicative approach. Techniques: + Ask and answer (say individually) + Work in pairs/ groups. + Discuss. III. Teaching aids: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Hương. 2.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(215)</span> Tiểu học Tiên Cát 2015 - 2016 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. VI. Teaching processes: 1. Class organization: - Greeting - Checking for the students' attendance. 2. Oral test: - Check pupils: write the new words and modal sentence 3. New lesson Teacher’s activities Ps’ activities Warm up play game Individual 1. Order the words 1. go/Let’s/swimming/to/the/pool.//I’m busy/sorry,/. ............................................................................................... T-WC 2. do/want/supermarket/why/go/to/you/the?// I/buy/want/vegetables/to/food/and. The whole class ............................................................................................... 3. How/the/read/much/sweater/is?//50.000 dong/It’s .............................................................................................. T- WC 4. sandals/how/are/the/much/green?//are/45.000 dong/they. ............................................................................................... 5. what/number/is/your//phone? ............................................................................................... 2. Answer the question. The whole class 1. Yes, I’d love to go for a walk. ...............................................................................................? 2. Linda wants to see tigers. ...............................................................................................? Groups work 3. Why does Nam like monkeys? ...............................................................................................? 4. I’m going to Hue imperial city. ...............................................................................................? 5. Minh and Manh are going swimming in the sea. ...............................................................................................? T-WC 3. Odd one out 1.a.noon b. school c. moon d. book 2.a.field b. cookie c. friend d. movie 3.a.bear b. teacher c. read d. meet Group work 4.a.beef b. seat c. leaf d. bread 5.a.fish b. dish c. see d. sugar 6.a.this b. that c. those d. thin 4. Odd one out (tress) 1.a.bookshop b. sandals c. jumper d. invite 2.a.repeat b. trousers c. enjoy d. complete 3.a.crocodile b. delicious c. elephant d. beautiful 4.a.wonderful b. November c. enormous d. December 4. Consolidation Nguyễn Thị Thanh Hương. 2.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(216)</span> Tiểu học Tiên Cát 2015 - 2016 - Consolidate the content of the lesson 5. Home link - Do exercises in the workbook. Learn by heart the new words and structure. Prepare the next lesson. ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Week 35 Preparing: 10/05/2016 Teaching: ................./2016 Period 139 + 140: The second term test. Nguyễn Thị Thanh Hương. 2.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(217)</span>